Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout2053 WP Ball Blvd (a)Marketp PROJECT: ace at Seminole Towne Center /krneri ca I s SCOPE OF DIVISION C WORK NOTE: THE AMEP SHEETS SUPEDE WORK LISTED, SCOPE OF WORK FOR REFEERENCE ONLY. 0 of ITEM: LLD GC SCOPE OF WORK TENANT GC SCOPE OF WORK � O 1- U 6 REMARKS: LLD GC SCOPE OF WORK TENANT GC SCOPE OF WORK EMARKS: OZ o uJ Z5 F O5 U 0 g O F- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A1.2 Construction Plan E3 Electrical Schedules & Details A2 10 - SPECIALTIES E4 Electrical Schedules & Details A3 Finish Plan E5 Electrical Specifications A4 1. PERMITS & FEES E6 O O Reflected Ceiling Plan GC TO PAY BALANCE (iP TIME OF PICK-UP 1. LAVATORY SPECIALTIES A6 Partition Types/ Door Pi O Information/ Elevations/ P2 2. INSPECTIONS Details O Plumbing Specifications and Risers Mechanical 2. STOREFRONT SIGN P4 Plumbing Details M1 O P5 Fire Sprinkler Specifications M2 3. TEMPORARY HEAT O HVAC Specifications 4. TEMPORARY ELECTRIC O 11 - SPECIALTIES 5. TEMPORARY ENCLOSURE 1. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS O 6. CONSTRUCTION BARRICADE 7. PROFESSIONAL CLEANUP O 12 - FURNISHINGS 1. CABINETRY O O HOME DEPOT ITEMS - GC TO PROVIDE 02 - SITE WORK 2. FRAME DISPLAY FIXTURES O INSTALLED BY FIXTURE COMPANY 1. DEMOLITION O AS NOTED 3. CASH REGISTERS O 2. SAW CUTTING OF SLAB N/A - NO SLAB 4. FURNITURE O 3. ROOF PENTRA71ONS O O 13 MECHANICAL 03 - CONCRETE SLAB 1. HVAC O O 1. CONCRETE SLAB O A. DIFFUSERS B. RETURNS 0 O 04 - MASONRY C. INT. DISTRIBUTION NETWORK 0 1. BRICK D. FINAL HVAC CHECK & BALANCE 0 2. CONCRETE BLOCK 2. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS O 3. EXHAUST FANS O 05- METALS 4. PLUMBING O 0 WATER & SEWER TAP EXISTING 1. METAL STUDS O A. TOILET ROOM 0 A. DEMISING WALL O O 1) WASTE WATER & VENT 2) FIXTURES O 1) GYP. BD. O O 0 B. INTERIOR PARTITIONS AND SOFFITS O 5. WATER HEATER O C. STOREFRONT MODIFICATIONS O O GC TO INSTALL NEW DOOR 6. SPRINKLER SYSTEM O O GC TO EXTEND LINES & INSTALL HEADS AS NEEDED 2. STANDARDS O 7. WATER COOLER O 3. MISCELLANEOUS 0 8. MOP SINK O 9. OTHER SINKS O INSTALL NEW AS SPECIFIED ON PLAN 06 - CARPENTRY EXAM ROOMS (2), BREAK AREA, TINT CLOSET, CONTACT LENS AREA 1. WOOD FRAMING N/A FIXTURE INSTALLERS USE TOGGLE BOLTS 16 ELECTRICAL 1. VOLTAGE AND PHASE A. UPGRADE O O O A. BLOCKING B. ROUGH CARPENTRY O 2. FINISH CARPENTRY O 2. SUB PANEL O IF REQUIRED A. SIGN J -BOX 0 07 - MOISTURE CONTROL O B. SIGN TIMECLOCK O 3. SMOKE EXHAUST SYSTEM O 08 -DOORS 4. SMOKE DETECTOR SYSTEM O 1. STOREFRONT O O 5. FIRE ALARM SYS. & DEVICES IF REQUIRED BY CRY 2. INTERIOR DOORS O 6. RECEPTACLES O A. HARDWARE O 7. LIGHT FIXTURES O 3. REAR EXIT DOOR O O A. LIGHTS O 1) 2X4 & 2X2 FLUOR. O 09 - FINISHES 2) ADDITIONAL LIGHTS O TRACK LIGHTING TO BE ORDERED I LY DUE TO LONG LEAD TIME IMMEDIATELY 1. FLOORS 3) EXIT/EMER. LIGHTS O A. SHEET VINYL O O TENANT PROVIDED, GC TO INSTALL 4) LAMPS O 1) WELDING RODS O 8. TELEPHONE O O B. CARPET O O TENANT PROVIDED, GC TO INSTALL PER MFG'S SPECIFICATIONS A. WIRING AND JACKS O 0 C. TRANSITION STRIPS O B. CONDUIT O O 2. WALLS 9. DATA LINE CONDUrr O O A. WALL.COVERING O O TENANT PROVIDED, GC TO INSTALL 10. COMPUTER R OUTLET pND 0 0 B. PAINT O 3. BASE O A. VINYL O O TENANT PROVIDED, GC TO INSTALL 4. CEILING O A. ACOUSTIC TILE O B. PAINT ON GYP. BD. O C. GRID O OWNER: Contacts LAWREN GROUP - Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0861 LOCATION Project Address: Marketplace at Seminole Towne Center 2053 WP Ball Blvd. Sanford, Florida 32771 LOCATION PLAN -Sanford, T T 0 GV 0 CV I- N E a) CD Cn 4i 0 W V u_ U Ell Le: L CONTACTS 0 U_ w Tenant: America's Best Contacts & Eyeglasses Contact: Scott Marynak 770-822-7264 ° Professional Seal: (z /� r� vJ General To Be Selected Contractor: B c� Z V MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc.•o Contact: Jason Eickmeier 402-391-7680 L OFFICE Project Cassidy Turley Manager: Contact: Anne Tettenhorst 314-392-2626 LIST OF DRAWINGS Number Sheet Name Number Sheet Name Architectural Electrical Cover Cover Sheet E1 Lighting Plan A1.1 Demolition Plan E2 Power Plan A1.2 Construction Plan E3 Electrical Schedules & Details A2 Fixture / Equipment Plan E4 Electrical Schedules & Details A3 Finish Plan E5 Electrical Specifications A4 Electrical Plan E6 Electrical Specifications A5 Reflected Ceiling Plan Plumbing A6 Partition Types/ Door Pi Plumbing Plan - Waste and Vent Information/ Elevations/ P2 Plumbing Plan - Water Details P3 Plumbing Specifications and Risers Mechanical P4 Plumbing Details M1 HVAC Plan P5 Fire Sprinkler Specifications M2 HVAC Schedules & Deatils M3 HVAC Specifications c& . s k .ry£?3I?� FiBFb"i'F9e ifF r I f D r n i n nt is'rif,nr:,ix51s p.c 'rAN erec� t s � FA Ll {t4F P#ra$ x HE s10 i fix � F "�N c Mrs' . , ihs Fc5 ' �k PLAN a n Z Er W 0- ICz CGDE SUMMARY W Applicable Building Cooles: W 2007 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE W/ 2009 REVISIONS �-- °q5 2007 FLORIDA PLUMBING CODE W/ 2009 REVISIONS 4-A 2007 FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE ca 2008 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE W C 2007 FLORIDA MECHANICAL CODE W/ 2009 REVISIONS a- O ENERGY EFFICIENCY CODE FOR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION, 2007 U FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, CHAPTER 13 m Cz Construction Type: .L II -B Unprotected, Non -Combustible Space is Fully Sprinklered E Occupancy■ (M) Mercantile SF AREA/PERSONS OCCUPANTS E SALES/PUBLIC AREA 2734 30 SF 92 BUSINESS AREAS 948 100 SF 10 STOCK AREAS 671 300 SF 3 z 4353 105 .�..� AREA OF WORK: 4353 SF OCCUPANT LOAD: 105 •� REQUIRED NUMBER OF EXITS: 2 NUMBER OF EXITS PROVIDED: 3 LEASED AREA: 4480 SF V This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific ILL.. project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or in part, orfor any other purpose or la. project without the written consent of the architect. Ij No. Description Date T CIO N T f� L ^D^ ..+. z U Project Number: 11256.C18 •O Issue Date: L September 20, 2011 Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.2315700 f 314.231.0916 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: riulwi ince, T A� 1 N M Cz Zi .L O LL O C/) CJ7 Cis C E= N O C .E (D �m CU _ a) cz 0 co a� (D L LO 2 N The Professional Architects seal affixed to this sheet applies only to the material and items shown on this sheet. All drawings, instruments or other documents not exhibiting this seal shall not be considered prepared by this architect, and this architect expressly disclaims any and all responsibility for such plans, drawings or documents not exhibiting this seal. This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: DEMOLITION PLAN Project Number: Sheet Number. 11256.C18 Drawn By: ARS Issue Date: , September 20, 2011 J J Y OR 00a 0z- a�ccT ILL 00w 0� cc2z:1 wcnQQ goCno Z Q f Y = O W Lo =Z Q QLL U) z O Cr O_ o_ w z O W Z 0 U LL U W (L rn FU U-) LL U) O 100 zz L) Q 0 ~ zRz0 UJ 9Z Q 0 zomccr) 0 z z cc U_ LU 0 H rn H z 16- 0 =0 Y L) W C7 O�m �OZ" 000w� wctnQQ >_0 WO o=z Q3.,tiz 2'-0" VERIFY FINAL FIXTURE & METAL PIPING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS & LOCATIONS WITH NVI 28'-8" (HOLD) ADJACENT TENANT: N/A, EXTERIOR OF BUILDING —� 10-3" 4' 6" ADD A LAYER OF DRYWALL TO ALL WALLS TO SMOOTH OUT WALLS. (THERE IS AN EXISTING PEBBLELIKE FINISH TO ALL WALLS). 26-11" DISPLAY 101 RECEPTION/ DISPENSE 100 ALIGN 9 C1 0 N = SIGN FASCIA CURTAIN WALL ABOVE --- -------------- J ------------------------- 0 _ ADD A LAYER OF DRYWALL TO ALL WALLS TO SMOOTH OUT WALLS. (THERE IS AN EXISTING PEBBLEUKE FINISH TO ALL WALLS). 4'-0" 2'4" 23'-2" (HOLD) (HOLD) (HOLD) NORTH U? 0 DR OFFICE 114 114 SUPPLY 117 O MGR 1 OFFICE 1 110 EXISTING SUPPLY COLUMN 116 c� 0 1 I r 1 1 2'-2" ,1 '-5" 450 , lZ 0 I nU Mo J W LU W Ca cna� 3'-3" 8'4" (HOLD) CONTACT LENS 102 SUPPLY 115 CONSULT N nor"MMI O LO = 21-511 (HOLD) I I 1 I 11 1 I a0 zvJll1 - agiI i o II ii 0 11 L- U) I� P 4 �i II O B PRE -CON 103 SIO:;t0 C8 CONSULT iv 112 b T 6-011 9'-711 �le Lie elol 78'-8" —ADJACENT TENANT: KOI NAIL SPA — PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR CONSTRUCTION PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RESTROOM/EWC PLAN PLUMBING SCHEDULE SIM, A6 TYP P-1 WATER CLOSET: SEE PLUMBING FOR SPECIFICATIONS. r.-- CL 6 CLEAR, I P-2 LAVATORY: SEE PLUMBING FOR SPECIFICATIONS. TYP P-3 WATER HEATER: 20 GALLON, SEE PLUMBING FOR SPECIFICATIONS LOCATE IN PLENUM ABOVE CEILING ° -I P-4 EXAM ROOM SINK: 15 IN. X 15 IN. X 7-1/2 IN. SIGNATURE STAINLESS STEEL BAR SINK W/ CADET BAR FAUCET - AX X11 TENANT GC PROVIDED - SEE SHEET A2, HOME DEPOT ITEMS FOR ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS P-5 BREAKROOM SINK: 25 IN. X 22 IN. X 8 IN. - ELKAY DAYTON ELITE STANLESS STEEL SINK W/ CADET 8" O.C. BAR a $ $ FAUCET - TENANT GC PROVIDED - SEE SHEET A2, HOME DEPOT ITEMS FOR ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRIC HI -LO WATER COOLERS: SEE PLUMBING FOR SPECIFICATIONS. I I 1 I 7 A6 SIM / P-7 JANITOR SINK 18"X18"X12" MOPSINK 1 COMPARTMENT BY ATLANTA CULINARY EQUIPMENT, MODEL # SE18181 M, rF SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFICATIONS. "AMARILLIS KITCHEN FAUCET' WALL MOUNTED, 8" CTR. GC TO 8 ITYPORDER FAUCET ONLINE OR FIND AT PLUMBING SUPPLY STORE. / NOTE: SEE PLUMBING SHEETS FOR ALL FLOOR DRAIN & CLEANOUT INFORMATION NOTE: GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO ORDER SINKS AND FAUCETS @ 102, 108, 111, 112 & 113. CONTRACTOR TO ORDER & PROVIDE ALL OTHER PLUMBING RELATED FIXTURES. (FIXTURE VENDOR TO SUPPLY UPPER & BASE CABINETS @ CONTACT LENS 102, FIXTURE 77777 VENOR TO SUPPLY BASE CABINET & COUNTERTOP @ CONSULTATION 111 & 112) 30"x48"CLEAR PLUMBING NOTES FLOOR SPACE, TYP 5-0" DIAM. TURNING 1. FIXTURE CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE SINKS AND FAUCETS IN COUNTERTOPS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PLUMBING RADIUS, TYP ROUGH -IN AND FINAL PLUMBING CONNECTIONS. 60" x 56" CLEAR 2. PROVIDE SINKS WITH MINIMUM 1 1/2" WASTE LINES, 1/2" HOT AND COLD WATER LINES, UNLESS GOVERNING AUTHORITIES PLAN FLOOR SPACE, TYP REQUIRE LARGER SIZES. NORTH 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL TRENCH EXISTING FLOOR SLABS AS NECESSARY, AND FILL LEVEL AND SMOOTH TO ADJACENT SLAB WITH RESTROOM PLAN -FOR REFERENCE CONCRETE OF STRENGTH EQUAL TO EXISTING SLAB. 2 4. PROVIDE CONCEALED SHUT OFF VALVES ON HOT AND COLD WATER LINES AT EACH SINK SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 5. DRAIN, VENT AND WATER PIPING SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE GOVERNING AUTHORITIES AND APPLICABLE CODES. T-3" 23'-11 " WAITING 109 PRE -CON 104 101-011 SUPPLY I I SUPPLY 118 119 0 BREAKROOM 108 PASSAGE ~' 105 NOTE: SEE 2/A1.2 FOR DETAILED PLAN OF THIS AREA P-6 0� P -2-tSUPPLY 113 5 MEN'S RESTROOM 4'-0" WH 107 P-7 ------- P-1-0 P-3 ABOVE MOP SINK 8'-0" 6 -6 - GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL NEW CONSTRUCTION AS INDICATED BY GRAPHIC LEGEND. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS COMPLETELY RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING ALL AS -IS CONDITIONS AT PROJECT SITE. 3. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING A COMPLETE CODE ACCEPTABLE PROJECT. HE MUST ALSO SATISFY ALL LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS AND TENANT'S FINAL PUNCH LIST NEEDS. 4. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL NECESSARY FIRE RESISTIVE WOOD BLOCKING BACKERS FOR ATTACHMENT OF ANY WALL HUNG ACCESSORIES, CASEWORK, ETC. 5. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE STUD SUPPORT AT DOOR FRAMES, BACKERS, AND ANY NECESSARY SHORING OF WALLS. 6. ALL CUSTOM FIXTURES THRU-OUT TENANTS SALES AREA WILL BE SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY TENANT'S FIXTURE COMPANY IN COORDINATION WITH TENANT'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 7. NO CHANGE IN USE OR EGRESS. 8. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL BUILDING CODES AND ALL OTHER APPLICABLE BUILDING CODES. 9. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE PLAN AT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. 10. CONSTRUCTION CANNOT BE ALLOWED TO BEGIN UNTIL A PERMIT HAS BEEN SECURED. GC RESPONSIBLE FOR PICKING UP PERMIT FOR TENANTS SCOPE OF WORK 11. ALL FINISH WOOD SHALL BE KILN DRIED, W/ MILL QUALITY FINISH AND ALL WOOD SHALL RECEIVE AFIRE RETARDANT COATING OR TREATMENT. NO WOOD OR OTHER COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL SHALL BE USED ABOVE ANY CEILING. 12. STRUCTURAL LUMBER TO BE DOUGLAS FIR #1 COMMON fs 1450 P.S.I. 13. ALL LUMBER TO BE GRADE MARKED PRIOR TO DELIVERY TO THE SITE. 14. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING ALL UTILITIES W/ CASSIDYTURLEY PROJECT MANAGER. 15. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SHORING AND BRACING ALL EXCAVATIONS IN ACCORDANCE W/ CITY, STATE AND OSHA REQUIREMENTS. 16. EXTERIOR SIGNAGE TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY TENANT'S SIGN CONTRACTOR (UNDER A SEPARATE PERMIT). LANDLORD'S GC TO COORDINATE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS W/ SIGN VENDOR. 17. ALL FIXTURES, FURNITURE AND CABINETRY TO BE INSTALLED BY TENANTS VENDOR, U.N.O. GC TO INSTALL BLOCKING WHERE REQUIRED. 18. PHONE BOARD TO BE MOUNTED VERICALLY (4'X8') @ 2-0" AFF. 19. PROVIDE 16 GAUGE METAL STUD FRAMING AT ALL DOOR OPENINGS TO PROVIDE ADDITIONAL BRACING. MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 1) WALL MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER: (F.E.) LARSEN'S MFG. COMPANY #MP -10, MP SERIES, DRY CHEMICAL, COLOR: RED, MOUNT SO THAT HANDLE IS NO HIGHER THAN 48" AFF, CONFIRM LOCATIONS WITH LOCAL GOVERNING AUTHORITIES NOTE: REFER TO SHEET A2 FOR FIXTURE LAYOUT AND FURNITURE LOCATIONS 0) X X W PHONE BOARD 2'-9" cV P-2 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 106 P-1 6-5" O N 4 z z O CV On 16- LU co �0Za pV~0 00_~ �0U_ oozy 60 GRORENLAW Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0616 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: N M 70 _O LL Cn - /C o V ♦ �rcz L.. V J C 0 Z Cn WO `^o L c - CCS .E " 1= U Cn (D -0 O � W SITE SPECIFIC NOTES vm 1. GC SHALL FLOAT ALL EXISTING DEMISING ,}J 0 WALLS AS REQUIRED DUE TO EXISTING WALL 05 TEXTURE. SURFACE SHALL BE PREPARED TO U J4.1 "LIKE NEW" CONDITION TO ACCEPT NEW O D M FINISHES. FIELD VERIFY EXACT CONDITIONS / O c: cLC0 LOCATIONS. 2. EXISTING STOREFRONT ENTRY DOORS si U N SHALL BE REPAIRED / ADJUSTED SO THAT THEY NO LONGER'DRAG' BUT OPERATE SMOOTHLY, "LIKE NEW" CONDITION. The Professional Architect's seal affixed to this sheet applies only to the material and items shown on this sheet. All drawings, instruments or other documents not exhibiting this seal shall not be considered prepared by GRAPHICLEGEND this architect, and this architect expressly disclaims any and all responsibility for such plans, drawings or documents not exhibiting this seal. C� EXISTING WALL This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the NEW DOOR AND DOOR N0. C� NEW WALLarchitect and may be used for this specific projed only. SEE A6 FOR DOOR SCHEDULE It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or ® NEW INSULATED WALL part or for any other purpose or project without the EXISTING TENANT written consent of the architect. EXISTING DOOR AND DOOR NO. ® SEPARATION WALL No. Description Date SEE A6 FOR DOOR SCHEDULE ® NEW TENANT SEPARATION WALL © 2A:10BC FIRE EXTINGUISHER VERIFY FINAL LOCATION WITH I DETAIL REFERENCE FIRE MARSHAL IN FIELD X SIM MARKER PARTITION TYPE INDICATOR =rl SEE SHEET A6 FOR DETAILS X Q P ELECTRICAL PANEL ELEVATION REFERENCE X X X MARKER X X IM SECTION REFERENCE MARKER sheet Title; CONSTRUCTION PLAN Project Number: Sheet Number. 11256.C18 Drawn By: ARS Issue hate: 1 September 20, 2011 eOUPN Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 I 314.231.DB16 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: FIXTURE SCHEDULE 11256.C18 CU A2 REMARKS FIXTURE KEYED NOTES 1❑ MILLWORK SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY AMERICA'S BEST VENDOR. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LOCATION WITH ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING ROUGH-INS.4" 2 SHELVING -ATLANTIC FIXTURE WILL BE SUPPLYING AND INSTALLING THE SHELVING IN THE SUPPLY AREAS. 3❑ BOOKSHELVES AND COAT RACK SUPPLIED BY NVI. FIXTURE DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION REMARKS FIXTURE DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION REMARKS A FIXTURE CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY AND COORDINATE LAYOUT OF WALL CABINETS WITH AM. BEST PRIOR TO INSTALLATION 1 " WIDE PANEL OA 16 COMPUTER SHROUD O PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY AMERICA'S BEST VENDOR O"2" WIDE PANEL O 17 BASE CABINET A 17A O NOT USED �J G) "3" WIDE PANEL OA 18 BASE CABINET B 18A 17A SMALLER OPTION - 18" X 18" CABINET 4O (3) 18" DISPLAY TABLES 0 19 20 EXAM ROOM COUNTER POS CABINET 18A SMALLER OPTION - 18" X 18" CABINET HOME DEPOT ITEMS (OR EQUAL) PROVIDED BY GC - INSTALLED BY AMERICA'S BEST VENDOR FIXTURE GENERAL NOTES 1. FIXTURE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE WIRE MANAGEMENT FOR POWER AND DATA WITHIN 'DISPENSING COUNTER' AND'RECEPTION COUNTER'. WIRE MANAGEMENT TO RUN ON EMPLOYEE SIDE OF PRIVACY WALL BELOW COUNTERTOP. COORDINATE LOCATIONS AND LENGTH OF RUNS WITH ELECTRICAL. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE 30 YARD DUMPSTER ON SITE FOR FIXTURE INSTALLATION. EMPTY DUMPSTER AND RETURN TO JOB SITE FOR STORE MERCHANDISING. ODM OFFICE FURNITURE 6 LOCKERS O 21 SALES COUNTER'DOUBLE' >111111% SKU# QTY. DESCRIPTION OSALES COUNTER'SINGLE' (1) SALES COUNTER'TRIPLE' O223-346 � 1 RIDGID WET DRY VACUUM WD1245 12 GAL a DISPENSING UNIT 23 DISPENSING COUNTER -LFT. HAND W 606991 1 24 IN. X 30 IN. HIGH BEVELED EDGE WALL MIRROR O CUSTOMER WRITE-UP 24 RECEPTION COUNTER - LFT. HAND Ca M 138235 3 AMERICAN STANDARD "CADET" 4" CTR. BAR FAUCET 2495 - CHROME 10 WAITING AREA SEATING O 25 PRE -EXAM ROOM COUNTER a) L_Lr) (a N/A 1 22 IN. X 25 IN. X 8 IN. - ELKAY DAYTON ELITE STAINLESS STEEL SINK 11 MANAGER'S SAFE N O TINT TANK COUNTER 130-920 1 HUSKY & LADDER TYPE 1 - 250 # 696307 1 CHROME KWIK FIT KITCHEN SINK STRAINER 12 CONTACT LENS BACK COUNTER 27 BASE CABINET &COUNTERTOP 508842 3 15 IN. X 15 IN. X 7-1/2 IN. SIGNATURE STAINLESS STEEL BAR SINK 13 CONTACT LENS WALL CABINET 28 BREAK COUNTER 353499 1 PLASTIC MIRROR MOUNTING CLIPS, SUPERSLIDEA (R) 14 WALL SIGNAGE PIPING O MIRROR PANEL OA 239984 1 AMERICAN STANDARD "CADET" 8" CTR. BAR FAUCET 6424 - CHROME 15 CONTACT LENS CUSTOMER COUNTER 30 O FLAT SCREEN TELEVISION N/A 1 AMARILLIS KITCHEN FAUCET, WALL MOUNTED 8" CTR. GC TO ORDER ONLINE OR PURCHASE FROM LOCAL PLUMBING SUPPLY STORE Project Title: T N co The Professional Architects seal affixed to this sheet applies only to the material and items shown on this sheet. All drawings, instruments or other documents not exhibiting this seal shall not be considered prepared by this architect, and this architect expressly disclaims any and all responsibility for such plans, drawings or documents not exhibiting this seal. This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: FIXTURE/ EQUIPMENT PLAN Projed Number: Sheet Number. 11256.C18 CU A2 Issue Date: �L _0 LL O L 'CIS CTSW 0 c >111111% 0 H Z Cn w (1) O � a_'E - CIO � 0 c U C W U C m C130 a) Ca M W a O cc O C) a) L_Lr) (a a 2 N The Professional Architects seal affixed to this sheet applies only to the material and items shown on this sheet. All drawings, instruments or other documents not exhibiting this seal shall not be considered prepared by this architect, and this architect expressly disclaims any and all responsibility for such plans, drawings or documents not exhibiting this seal. This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: FIXTURE/ EQUIPMENT PLAN Projed Number: Sheet Number. 11256.C18 Drawn By: ARS A2 Issue Date: September 20_2011 N.I.C. SIM PT 6-8" X 6-0" WALK -OFF MAT (18"X18" CARPET TILES) NA vU r - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L_ 0 PT DR OFFICE 114 MGR OFFICE 110 SUPPLY 116 , RECEPTION/ ❑ ❑ 7E1 ---2 DISPENSE --- I I 100 I I I I I I / r I I I I I I I I I FINISH SCHEDULE 'ETR'- EXISTING TO REMAIN ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE WALLS CEILING RM# 100 RECEPTION/DISPENSE CPT1/CPT2 VB1 WC1 ACT1 101 DISPLAY ROOM CPTi VBi WC1 ACTT 102 CONTACT LENS SALES CPT1 VB1 WC1 ACTT 103 PRE -CON ROOM 1 CPTi VB1 WC1 ACT1 104 PRE -CON ROOM 2 CPT1 VB1 WC1 ACTT 105 PASSAGE VCT VB1 WC1 ACT1 106 RESTROOM VCT VB1 WC1 ACTT 107 RESTROOM VCT VB1 WC1 ACT1 108 BREAKROOM VCT VB1 WC1 ACT1 109 WAITING ROOM CPT1 VB1 WC1 ACT1 110 MANAGER'S OFFICE CPT1 VB1 WC1 ACT1 111 CONSULT ROOM 1 CPT1 VB1 WC1 ACT1 112 CONSULT ROOM 2 CPT1 VB1 WC1 ACTT 113 SUPPLY VCT VB1 WC1 ACTT 114 DOCTOR'S OFFICE CPTi VB1 WC1 ACT1 115 SUPPLY CPT1 VB1 PT2 ACT1 116 SUPPLY CPTi VB1 PT2 ACT1 117 SUPPLY CPT1 VB1 PT2 ACTT 118 SUPPLY - - - - 119 SUPPLY - - - - ONTACT LENS 102 SUPPLY PT ----- 115 ----- - 0 . F-1 SUPPLY 117 1. 0 PRE -CON 103 (3 0 CONSULT 111 CONSULT 112 0 PRE -CON 104 o - SUPPLY 118 om SEAL EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR; VERIFY FLOOR SEALER SPECIFICATIONS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. WAITING 109 3 SIM C7 3 SIM A6 Mm l®rm-0 SUPPLY 119 SEAL EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR; VERIFY FLOOR SEALER SPECIFICATIONS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. BREAKROOM ------- I r PASSAGE 105 SUPPLY PLAN 113 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR FINISH PLAN MEN'S (1&.'S'CALE: RESTROOM 1/4" - 1'-0" FINISH LEGEND REMARKS FLOORING �@ '@ CPTi CARPET TILE, SIZE 36"X36". TILE & ADHESIVE SUPPLIED BY AMERICA'S BEST CONTACTS AND EYEGLASSES, INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO MEASURE AND REQUEST CARPET FROM NATIONAL VISION, INC./ ANNE KRAMER AS SOON AS (AXB) CONTRACT IS AWARDED TO ENSURE TIMELY DELIVERY TO JOBSITE. A CPT2 MILLIKEN - WALK OFF CARPET -4043-20S SIZE 20"X20", NAME: CLEEN SWEEP. SUPPLIED BY AMERICA'S BEST CONTACTS AND EYEGLASSES, INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO MEASURE AND REQUEST CARPET FROM NATIONAL VISION, INC./ANNE A B KRAMER AS SOON AS CONTRACT IS AWARDED TO ENSURE TIMELY DELIVERY TO JOBSITE. A VCT MANNINGTON SAFE WALKS 12X12 TILES, COLOR 1800 NAVY, TYPE 4 GC TO PROVIDE QUOTE FOR INSTALLATION ONLY. NVI WILL PAY FOR PRODUCT; CASSIDYTURLEY WILL PROVIDE AWARDED CONTRACTOR A WITH MANNINGTON CONTACT INFORMATION FOR ORDERING. GC TO PROVIDE GLUE / ADHESIVE FOR VCT. FLOORING ADHESIVE D GLUE STANDARD PRESSURE SENSITIVE GLUE - TO BE SENT WITH CARPET AND ORDERED BY NVI. D VINYL BASE VB1 MANNINGTON: EDGE TV, 904 BARK. GC TO PROVIDE QUOTE FOR INSTALLATION ONLY. NVI WILL PAY FOR PRODUCT; CASSIDYTURLEY WILL PROVIDE AWARDED CONTRACTOR WITH MANNINGTON CONTACT INFORMATION FOR ORDERING. 4" VINYL WALL BASE (6" COVE IN RESTROOMS). GC TO PROVIDE GLUE / ADHESIVE FOR VINYL BASE. CORNER GUARDS CG1 SPEC INTRO CORNER GUARD, IPC -SMOOTH, TAPE -ON CORNER GUARD. 1.800.222.5556, WWW.INPR000RP.COM A A 1-1.2: (38 MM) WING, 080" (2MM) THICK RIGID VINYL. 3'(.91M), COLOR: GRAYSTONE 0151 E WALL COVERING WC1 MANUFACTURER: BOLTA, TYPE II, WEIGHT: 18 OZ., WIDTH: 54" (THROUGH- REPEAT: NON -REPEATING OUT, U.N.O.) SUPPLIED BY AMERICA'S BEST CONTACTS AND EYEGLASSES, INSTALLED BY G.C. G.C. TO MEASURE AND REQUEST WALLCOVERING FROM NATIONAL VISION, INC./ ANNE KRAMER AS SOON AS THE CONTRACT IS AWARDED PAINT TO ENSURE TIMELY DELIVERY TO THE JOBSITE. PT1 PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY G.C. SHERWIN WILLIAMS, COLOR -HERON PLUME #6070, SEMI -GLOSS FINISH C PT2 PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY G.C. SHERWIN WILLIAMS, COLOR -AGREEABLE GRAY #7029, SEMI -GLOSS FINISH C PT3 PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY G.C. - SEAL & PAINT FLOORS -SHERWIN WILLIAMS, COLOR -AGREEABLE GRAY #7029, SEMI -GLOSS FINISH ACOUSTIC ACTT CEILING - SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR NEW CEILING LOCATIONS PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY G.C. ARMSTRONG FISSURED SQUARE #755, WHITE, 24"X48"X3/". INVERTED T 15/6' WHITE GRID SUPPORTED WITH #8 TIE WIRE. OR APPROVED EQUAL o - SUPPLY 118 om SEAL EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR; VERIFY FLOOR SEALER SPECIFICATIONS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. WAITING 109 3 SIM C7 3 SIM A6 Mm l®rm-0 SUPPLY 119 SEAL EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR; VERIFY FLOOR SEALER SPECIFICATIONS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. BREAKROOM ------- I r PASSAGE 105 SUPPLY 113 MEN'S WOMEN'S RESTROOM RESTROOM 107 106 �@ '@ 0 0 LS�001 E MOM GENERAL FINISH NOTES 1) NO SUBSTITUTIONS ON PAINT. PAINT SHOULD COMPLETELY COVER THE SURFACE WITH A SMOOTH, EVEN AND CONSISTENT FINISH. PAINT FINISH SHALL BE FREE OF CONTAMINATION FROM DUST, DEBRIS OR BRUSH AND ROLLER FIBERS. SAND BETWEEN COATS AS NECESSARY. CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO ENSURE PAINT IS NOT APPLIED TO ADJACENT HARDWARE OR WALL FINISHES. ANY PAINTING MISTAKES SHOULD BE COMPLETELY REMOVED IMMEDIATELY WITHOUT DAMAGE TO THE AFFECTED SURFACE. 2) PAINT ALL DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES PT -1; OIL BASED. 3) INTERIOR FINISHES (I.E. WALLS, CEILING TILES, ETC.) SHALL HAVE A FLAME SPREAD RATING OF 75 OR LESS WITH A MAX. SMOKE GENERATION FACTOR OF 450 IN CORRIDORS PER CODE. 4) G.C. TO PROVIDE ALL TOOLS, ACCESSORIES, ADHESIVES, ETC. AS NECESSARY TO INSTALL WALLAND FLOOR FINISHES. 5) INSTALL INTRO CORNER GUARDS ON ALL EXTERIOR CORNERS IN PASSAGES, CORRIDORS, AISLES, HALLWAYS, WAITING ROOM AREAS, ENTRANCE TO CONTACT LENS ROOM, AND SALES AREA. 6) NVI TO PROVIDE ALL ACCESSORIES (I.E. TOILET AND HAND TOWEL DISPENSER) IN RESTROOMS, EXCEPT GRAB BARS & MIRROR, WHICH SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE GC. 7) NVI TO ORDER & PROVIDE NUSPRAYLOCK PLATINUM FLOORING ADHESIVE FOR ALL CARPET INSTALLATION. 8) GC TO INSTALL WALLCOVERING; WHEN INSTALLING MAKE SURE ALL SEAMS & RUNS ARE GOING THE SAME DIRECTION. INSTALL WALLCOVERING WITH A MOLD RESISTANT PASTE. 9) CARPET AND WALL COVERING WILL BE DELIVERED TO SPECIFIED LOCATION BY NVI. GC WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR UNLOADING AND BRINGING MATERIAL INTO THE BUILDING. 10) CARPET TILE TO BE INSTALLED IN MONOLITHIC DIRECTION. NOTE: G.C. TO INSTALL ALL CARPETING PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. G.C. MUST PROVIDE DOCUMENTATION OF MOISTURE TESTING FOR BOTH EXISTING AND GREEN CONCRETE TO BE APPROVED BY ANNE KRAMER WITH CASSIDYTURLEY BEFORE CARPET INSTALLATION. THE MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF MOISTURE EMISSION FROM THE FLOOR IS 3.0 POUNDS PER 1,000 SQUARE FEET IN A 24 HOUR PERIOD. THE ACCEPTABLE PH RANGE IS 7.0 TO 9.0. THIS SPECIFICATION MUST BE MET IN ORDER TO KEEP ALL PRODUCT WARRANTIES IN PLACE AND PREVENT FLOORING FAILURE. GC MUST SEAL ALL GREEN CONCRETE. ONCE TEST IS REVIEWED, ANNE WILL NOTIFY THE G.C. HOW TO PROCEED, REMARKS AO VINYL BASE TO BE INSTALLED AFTER FIXTURE CONTRACTOR INSTALLATION OF MILLWORK BASE CABINET n6 GC TO WRAP WALL COVERING ALL THE WAY UP SOFFIT TO CEILING; SEE DETAIL VAG. OAREA TO REMAIN 'AS -IS'. NO FINISHES SHALL BE APPLIED TO THIS AREA, EXCEPT AS NOTED OTHERWISE. D❑ INSTALL FRP TO 4'-0" A.F.F. IN RESTROOMS ON THREE WALLS - THE WALL BEHIND THE LAVATORY AND TOILET, THE WALL NEXT TO THE TOILET AND ON THE WALL NEXT TO THE LAVATORY. OGC TO SUPPLY FRP TO BE INSTALLED AS BACK SPLASH FOR THE WALLS TO THE LEFT, RIGHT AND BEHIND THE MOP SINK FRP TO BE INSTALLED DURING FIXTURE INSTALL & COORDINATED W/FIXTURE INSTALLERS. LAWREN GROUP Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.2315700 1314.231.0916 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Prolmlonal Seal: Project Title: T N co CIO .O LL C>) � (1)o as L CD CZ C U CD M � � W 3 Z ❑ C/)a) � � IC CZ �E CD W ' �. 0 C CZ C) m W W°' � co: L M CC Cao CL U 2N The Professional Architect's seal affored to this sheet applies only to the material and items shown on this sheet. All drawings, instruments or other documents not exhibiting this seal shall not be considered prepared by this architect, and this architect expressly disclaims any and all responsibility for such plans, drawings or documents not exhibiting this seal. This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title; FINISH PLAN Projed Number: Sheet Number. 11256.C18 Drawn By: ARS Issue Data: A3 September 20, 2011 \Y/ 9" 9. 9.. I 18. 18. 18.. I 1S„ L — v 18" 18 SUPPLY o M L SF I 1 I 117 _ _ _ 3,-0" I I 80" 38" i _ _ CONSULT �� -� �� r _ 71 I I -----' DR OFFICE � 111 J�_J� L_J 114 —JIJ � 18" t 4'-0" 1 EXISTING DUPLEX EX 1 1„ �\ PRINTER �� LOCATION 18” 18 SUPPLY RECEPTICAL IN �\ �� \ 9" 18. 118 18..SUPPLY 18 9 CEILING, TYP.16'-0" \� \� �� �� 13'-0"0A 18" 1 ' 18" 18" �— -- m m I — 18'• 18' D 18" o M L--- GF8I ♦7/.,i1 r------ -- i 11 31-0 � \ \\ I 80' �H OFMGR ICE 110 CONSULT _ — 112 38„ i PRINTER DISPLAY I —`J SUPPLY LOCATION 18" 18" 101 -- 116 �? 1 1 4'-0" x 4. w W 0 —_J 18" 18" 18" EX II t 11 18" 18.' w w 0 t` PRINTER LOCATION PROVIDE PHONE BOARD: 13'-6" �� ,� > 17'-0" e Lo EQ, EQ, SECURITY 3'-8"' X 8'X 1/2" 1811 84.. PLYWOOD PANEL @ 2'-0" AFF i KEYPAD _ _ _ i PROVIDE 30A DEDICATED J ��� liv- III I 11146" — —gym PA 46"18"CIRCUIT �� �� III ------- S,_7—,,------ FRIDGE BY ILOCATED � _ �---� III I III AMERICA'S BEST ABOVE _ — Ide 1 CEILING FOR SIGN COORDINATE�'---JIB —�� • PRINTER ji j I WAITING 18 1g" 18 SIGN ®X �� LOCATION i i 18. 109 VEINDORTH I iii I 7'-5" III i " 46 BREAKROOM 146. L — 108 I I �GFCI III 18" 18' CONTACT LENS 102 PASSAGE 18110 105 2'-9" 2'-7" 5'-8" 11'-7" 6-7" 1'-5" 5'-5" 18. 88 V 41 e ---- -- —71 RECEPTION/ --------- ---------- DISPENSE r----------------------- —,�\ 100 100 18" 018-1 5'-2.. IF \ F 07 i i— J ---- _ 1811 \ ® �/ PRE -CON PRE -CON �i PRINTER LOCATION Q 103 104 • ° E � � p 1 1 I -----T-----7 -----T-----7 SUPPLY 1 I II I I I I 18" 113 18" 42" 42" I I CONTRACTOR TO LEAVE WHIP TO 18.1 -- 1 1 18" 1 1 GF GFCI EXTEND THROUGH CONDUIT TO BE MEN'S WOMEN'S RESTROOM RESTROOM ____ DIRECTLY MQV ED TO FIXTURE __ -------------- DED 107 106 =hp - 4 4 - 20A11 - r----- 42„ � 18.1 ----- ----------------------- I I--------------- 118�� I —� I I I----------- SUPPLY 46" 115 -----`c'---7 I 38" ---- `� --� 38" r— ---��� I----t4GF:r.1 O O I 61„I 0 . 1 1 % 1 I 0 1 -4 GC TO INSTALL 61” OUTLET TO BE ON 46" SWITCH FOR8" GC TO INSTALL ELECTRICAL BOX & LV CAN LIGHTS & SURFACE MOUNTEDELECTRICAL 4' - BOX & LV BOX AT 2" A.F.F. FLUORESCENT ([2] FIXTURE TYPE'D1', BOX AT 2" A.F.F. [4] FIXTURE TYPE 'E') IN THIS AREA 8'4" op (HOLD) PLAN NORTH PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN 1 ELECTRICAL LEGEND 'EX' = DENOTES EXISTING SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" DUPLEX OUTLET V DEDICATED LINE (MODEM) QUADRAPLEX OUTLET 4 DEDICATED LINE (HYPERCOM) ® SURFACE MOUNTED QUADRAPLEX OUTLET Q CEILING DUPLEX OUTLET Q PHONE LINE(2) JUNCTION BOX �] PHONE LINE (PITNEY BOWES) ELECTRICAL PANEL F EP Q PHONE LINE (FAX) v DATA PORT O4 FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED QUADRAPLEX OULET • F ELECTRICAL NOTES -PROVIDE (1) TWO -GANG RECESSED FOR POWER AND DATA, TO RECEIVE (1) DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND (1) DUPLEX DATA/TELE PORT, INDICATED AS'FB' OR'WB' ON PLAN. -880CS2-CAST IRON, EQUAL PLASTIC FLOOR BOX, TWO -GANG, FULLY ADJUSTABLE -827-PC-BLK TWO -GANG, POLYCARBONATE CARPET FLANGE -PROVIDE TWO -GANG POLYCARBONATE COVER PLATE TO ACCOMMODATE POWER AND DATA -PROVIDE ONE 20 AMP CIRCUIT FOR NO MORE THAN (2) FLOOR BOXES. -G.C. TO INSTALL (3) 1" DIAMETER CONDUITS WITHIN FLOOR TO FLOOR BOX, (1) FOR POWER, (1) FOR DATA. RUN DATA CONDUIT UP NEAREST WALL AND EXTEND 6" ABOVE CEILING. PROVIDE FISH LINE WITHIN CONDUIT -PRINTERS REQUIRE TEL/DATA LINE SEPARATE FROM POS LINE BUT IN SAME FLOOR BOX. -ALL ELECTRICAL OUTLETS AND EXIT SIGNS PER TENANT'S PLANS -ALL UTILITIES TO BE SEPARATELY METERED BY LANDLORD LRtUP Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0918 Project Team: General Contractor. To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: Project Title: o Cn fiJ F_ V." 0 C CU ZE _W 0 C .E CD 2t 0 � m Co _ 0 m c5 0— Q. CD LO � M Cli 0 N The Professional Architect's seal affixed to this sheet applies only to the material and items shown on this sheet. All drawings, instruments or other documents not exhibiting this seal shall not be considered prepared by this architect, and this architect expressly disclaims any and all responsibility for such plans, drawings or documents not exhibiting this seal. This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: ELECTRICAL PLAN Project Number: Sheet Number. 11256.C18 Drawn By: ARS Issue Date: A4 September 20, 2011 SCALE: 1/4" = V -0"I WITH THE EXCEPTION OF RESTROOM CEILINGS TO BE INSTALLED AT 8'-0" A.F.F. CEILING PLAN LEGEND 'EX' = DENOTES EXISTING FIXTURE, 'REL = DENOTES RELOCATED FIXTURE SYMBOL I DESCRIPTION I REMARKS I SYMBOL I DESCRIPTION I REMARKS I SYMBOL I DESCRIPTION I REMARKS I SYMBOL I DESCRIPTION I REMARKS 2'x4' FLUORESCENT FIXTURE, PARABOLIC SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT OPEN OR APPROVED EQUAL EXHAUST FAN SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR LENSE W/ BRUSHED METAL FINISH SPECIFICATIONS. -(�D1 DOWNLIGHTING 0 SPECIFICATIONS. O SPRINKLER HEAD 2'x4' FLUORESCENT'NIGHT LIGHT' FIXTURE, SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR 1'x4' (2) TUBE FLUORESCENT OR EQUAL, SUBMIT EXIT SIGN NL PARABOLIC LENSE W/ BRUSHED METAL SPECIFICATIONS. E FIXTURE, SW STRIP - STANDARD SUBSTITUTIONS TO NVI FOR STANDARD LIGHT SWITCH WALL SWITCHES SHALL BE FINISH OR EXISTING TRIP WIDE APPROVAL. MOUNT @ INSIDE OF HEAVY DUTY, TOGGLE, QUIET SOFFIT, SEE 2/A2 FOR LOCATION. TYPE, FULLY ENCLOSED IN COMPOSITE CASES, AND RATED EXISTING 2'x4' FLUORESCENT FIXTURE SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO 20 AMP AT 277 VOLT AC. USE SPECIFICATIONS. 2'X 2' SUPPLY DIFFUSER INSTALL NEW. 3 3 -WAY LIGHT SWITCH TO CONTROLFLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES @ SINGLE POLE, OR DIMMER AS EX CONSULTATION ROOMS SO LEVI ON DHOWN ON R COIRA SERIES SR (COLOR WHITE WITH WHITE 2'x2' FLUORESCENT FIXTURE, PARABOLIC SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO DIMMER SWITCH, TO CONTROL COVERPLATE, TYPICAL (DIM) LENSE W/ BRUSHED METAL FINISH SPECIFICATIONS. 2' X 2' RETURN DIFFUSER INSTALL NEW. � CAN LIGHT FIXTURES @ THROUGHOUT AREA OF WORK) 1:1 0 CONSULTATION ROOMS LENGTH OF TRACK AND NUMBER OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO (FAN) TRACK FIXTURES HEADS AS SHOWN ON PLAN. INSTALL NEW. SWITCH, TO CONTROL EXHAUST t� COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS, VX 2' RETURN AIR DIFFUSER FAN C SPECIFICATIONS AND ACCESSORIES F=7 WITH TENANT. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHT CIRCUITING INFORMATION. RECESSED INCANDESCENT FIXTURE OR APPROVED EQUAL GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO TRACK LIGHTING ACCESSORIES 2'X 4' RETURN DIFFUSER INSTALL NEW. (FAN/LT) SWITCH, TO CONTROL EXHAUST MANUFACTURER: UTON LIGHTING D $ FANS AND LIGHTS @ TOILET ACCESSORY AND MODEL NUMBER: ROOMS (1 -CIRCUIT): STRAIGHT CONNECTOR- LP903W, 'L' CONNECTOR- LP943W, 8' INDIVIDUAL TRACK- LP08W, 4' INDIVIDUAL TRACK- LP04W, 2' INDIVIDUAL TRACK- LP02W, FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR- LP902W, COLOR: WHITE eOUP Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0816 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: Project Title: r N M cz a L- 0 O LL O cts CL)L ^ VrJ 4-0 CZ U)U 3 ZW a) O Cf!) 0 — 0 (� �E cc Cn a) -0 U U ♦.., W 'i V Ca Co— W C0 O CZ U m Wa)c) E c:� c)- O(L < O Yce) fr U �N The Professional Architects seal affixed to this sheet applies only to the material and items shown on this sheet. All drawings, instruments or other documents not exhibiting this seal shall not be considered prepared by this architect, and this architect expressly disclaims any and all responsibility for such plans, drawings or documents not exhibiting this seal. This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN Project Number: Sheet Number. 11256.C18 Drawn By: ARS Issue Date: A5 September 20, 2011 PARTITION TYPES CEILING PLAN DETAILS NOTE: USE CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVE TO TO �- N0.8 TIE WIRE N0.8 TIE WIRE ADHERE THE ENTIRE BOTTOM PLATE TO THE N0.8 TIE WIRE NO.8 TIE 3-5/8" 25 GA. MTL. STUD. BRACE FLOOR AND SHOOT IN/PIN IT EVERY 1'-0". USE WIRE PLACED ON ALTERNATING SIDES OF PROVIDE THREADED ROD TO 3-5/8" 25 GA. MTL. STUD. BRACE 3-5/8" 25 GA. MTL. STUD. BRACE ONE PIECE OF DRYWALL TO CUT OUT THE TOP 3-5/8" 25 GA. MTL. STUD. BRACE WALL AT 48" O.C., MIN. TWO PER -F- EXISTING CONSTRUCTION STRUCTURE ABOVE, LOCATE (1) IN PLACED ON ALTERNATING SIDES OF PLACED ON ALTERNATING SIDES OF PIECE OF WALL. g" PLACED ON ALTERNATING SIDES OF WALL. EXTEND AND FASTEN CENTER OF SPAN AND PROVIDE WALL AT 48" O.C., MIN. TWO PER WALL AT 48" O.C., MIN. TWO PER WALL AT 48" O.C., MIN. TWO PER SECURELY TO UNDERSIDE OF ADDITIONAL 4'-0" OC EACH DIRECTION WALL. EXTEND AND FASTEN WALL. EXTEND AND FASTEN 3/4" 3 5/8" 3/4' 2" ANCHOR BOLT WALL. EXTEND AND FASTEN STRUCTURAL DECK OR BEAM ABOVE. PARTITION TO TERMINATE FROM MIDPOINT. SECURELY TO UNDERSIDE OF SECURELY TO UNDERSIDE OF LOCATION, TYP. SECURELY TO UNDERSIDE OF AT UNDERSIDE OF ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND GRID STRUCTURAL DECK OR BEAM ABOVE. h STRUCTURAL DECK OR BEAM ABOVE. STRUCTURAL DECK OR BEAM ABOVE. ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND GRID EXISTING CONSTRUCTION SUSPENDED FROM ABOVE. SEE 0 0 SUSPENDED FROM ABOVE. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR LAYOUT. " ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND GRID ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND GRID 3 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AND GRID REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR C TEARAWAY L -BEAD AS SUSPENDED FROM ABOVE. SEE SUSPENDED FROM ABOVE. SEE A6 ° ° �"' NOTE: SEE SUSPENDED FROM ABOVE. SEE YOUT. CONTINUOUS MANUFACTURED BYTRIM-TEX, REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR CONSTRUCTION a REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR (OFFICE SIDE) @ 10'-0" A.F.F. STUD RUNNER LINCOLNWOOD, IL 800-874-2333 r LAYOUT. LAYOUT. 1/8"STEEL PLAN FOR TUBE Z ;. LAYOUT. MATCH EXISTING SECURE TOP RUNNER TO SECURE TOP RUNNER TO STEEL PLATE & O p SECURE TOP RUNNER TO TOP RUNNER WALL THICKNESS INSULATION WHERE (1) LAYER 1/2" TYPE -X GYP. BD. EACH SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM, USE 2 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM, USE 2 1/8" STEEL BASE TUBE Z SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM, USE2 INDICATED ON PLAN SIDE, AND UNDERSIDE, OF 3-5/8" 25 4 7/8 #10 @ 16" O.C., BRACE TO DECK OR 8 #10 @ 16" O.C., BRACE TO DECK OR PLATE LOCATIONS p 4 1/4" #10 @ 16 O.C., BRACE TO DECK OR (RESTROOM SIDE) @ 8 0 A.F.F. N 21 r, GA. MTL. STUDS AT 16" O.C.-PROVIDE BEAMS ABOVE. y BEAMS ABOVE. x BEAMS ABOVE. " CORNER BEAD, TAPE, SPACKLE, AND (1) LAYER 5/8" TYPE -X GYP. BD. EACH ;N (1) LAYER 5/8" TYPE -X GYP. BD. EACH @ 7'-4" A.F.F. „ (1) LAYER 5/8 w "° (1) LAYER 5/8" TYPE -X GYP. BD. (1) LAYER 5/8" TYPE -X GYP. BD. EACH 5/8" GYP. BOARD ON EA. SIDE OF MTL SAND READY FOR FINISHES SIDE OF 3-5/8" 25 GA MTL. STUDS AT - SIDE OF 3-5/8" 25 GA MTL STUDS AT - TYPE -X GYP. BD. Cr w OFFICE SIDE OF 3-5/8" 25 GA. MTL. SIDE OF 3-5/8" 25 GA. MTL. STUDS AT STUDS @ 16" O.C. 16 O.C. TAPE, SPACKLE, AND SAND 16 O.C. TAPE, SPACKLE, AND SAND EACH SIDE, AND x STUDS AT 16" O.C. TAPE, SPACKLE, 16 O.C. TAPE, SPACKLE, AND SAND 25 GAUGE - Q SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT READY FOR FINISHES READY FOR FINISHES @ 7'-0" A.F.F. TOP, OF 3-5/8" 20 z AND SAND READY FOR FINISHES READY FOR FINISHES l FLUORESCENT GA. MTL. STUDS AT O 3" OF 2.5#/CF SOUND ATTENUATION i6" O.C.-PROVIDE U COR CORNER BEAD, 3" OF 2.5#/CF SOUND ATTENUATION 5 *: BATT INSULATION OF FIBERGLASS SECURE 5/8" GYP. BD 4 7/8„ TO 3 5/8" TUBE STL TAPE, SPACKLE, AND x BATT INSULATION OF FIBERGLASS WRAP WALL COVERING ON BOTH WITH HILTI HIT -RE �' SAND TO READY FOR Z SECURE CONTINUOUS STUD SIDES OF SOFFIT TO UNDERSIDE OF CONTINUOUS 3-5/8" 25 GA. MTL. CONTINUOUS 3-5/8" 25 GA. MTL 500 -SD EPDXY FINISHES CONTINUOUS 25 GA. MTL 4L CONTINUOUS 3-5/8" 25 GA. MTL. RUNNER TO EXISTING SLAB CEILING, TYP. RUNNER. FASTEN USING 0.140" DIA. x RUNNER. FASTEN USIN G 0 14 " DIA x 0 ADHESIVE ANCHOR RUNNER. FASTEN USING 0.140 DIA. x RUNNER. FASTEN USING 0.140 DIA. x WITH EXPANSION ANCHORS CORNER BEAD 3/4", EMBED AT 16" O.C. W; 3/4", EMBED AT 16" O.C. SYSTEM, OR EQUAL BASE AS SCHEDULED w 3/4", EMBED AT 16" O.C. 3/4", EMBED AT 16" O.C. Q p C q BASE AS SCHEDULED BASE AS SCHEDULED 1/8" STEEL TUBE v SEALANT BASE AS SCHEDULED BASE AS SCHEDULED BASE AND x SEALANT SEALANT WELDED TO BASE FLOOR FINISH AS a SEALANT SEALANT FLOOR FINISH PLATE _- SCHEDULED SEE SCHEDULE FLOOR FINISH AS SCHEDULED FLOOR FINISH AS SCHEDULED 1/8" BASE PLATE J",CONC. SECURE 1/8" BASE FLOOR FINISH AS SCHEDULED FLOOR FINISH AS SCHEDULED CURTAIN �ALL�/FASCIA SECTION Y `e x PLATE TO EXISTING EXISTING SLAB W/ 2" CONC. SLAB ANCHOR BOLTS SCALE . 1-1/2" 7/8" PARTITION 4 7/8" PARTITION VSCALE: 1-1/2" = 1'-0" 2 SCALE : 1-1/2" = 1'-0" PARTIAL HEIGHT 4 1 /4" ���TITION � SCALE : 1-1/2" = 1'-0" SCALE : 1-1/2" RE��'M�qT�PARTITION SCAL G PARTITION INFILL V SCALE: 1-1/2" = 1'-0" METAL FRAMING AS REQUIRED FINISH DETAILS ELEVATIONS 1 5 8" -X GYP. BD. EACH SIDE, AND UNDERSIDE, OF 3-5/8" 25 ALL METAL PIPING SUPPLIED VERIFY FINAL FIXTURE & METAL SIGNAGE PROVIDED GA. MTL. STUDS AT 16" O.C.-PROVIDE CORNER AND INSTALLED BY AMERICA'S PIPING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS SIM 1 BY AMERICA'S BEST + + BEAD, TAPE, SPACKLE, AND BEST FIXTURE CONTRACTOR & LOCATIONS WITH NVI A6 SIGN CONTRACTOR + + + + .. SAND READY FOR FINISHES q r- ---------------- ----� ti• (GLAZING SIDE) @ 12'-3" A.F.F. 1 _ L_ _ _ OPEN TO BEYOND N 4'-0" P-6: SEE PLUMBING VINYLTRANSITION DOOR 1 I �r SCHEDULE FOR N0.8 TIE WIRE SPECIFICATIONS VINYL THRESHOLD Q ACC. SLAT COMPOSITION TILE CARPET WMAX. HEIGHT + Ya" -Y" 2 b OPEN TO BEYOND OPEN TO BOARD BEYOND ,qct - EXISTING GLAZING -VERIFY _0 47/811 `D EXACT HEIGHT IN FIELD SLOPE = � 1 W 11 �i� h• � r '1 (OFFICE SIDE) @ 10'-0" A.F.F. A , ' D� D D ° ° D ° D D D D o D D° o D °D � CV C `� (GLAZING SIDE) @ 9'-10" A.F.F. ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE D° D ° e D AND GRID SUSPENDED FROM ABOVE. SEE RCP FOR 1 VB 2 1 29 3 C VB VB LAYOUT. TYP. TYP. TYP. WALL MTD. TYP. CORNER BEAD TRANSITION DETAIL TRANSITION DETAIL ELEVATION ONL RENCE V1/4 FFIT SECTION @STOREFRONT 3 4 &ELEVATION 2 ,__ 3 - 1'-0' SCALE : 3 - 1'-0" „_ CALE : 1 /4 - 1-0 SCALE E. = 1'-0" SCALE: 1-1/2" = 1'-0" DOOR TYPES DOOR SCHEDULE ETR- EXISTING TO REMAIN HARDWARE SCHEDULE ALL HARDWARE TO BE SUPPLIED AS SPECIFIED; APPROVED EQUALS BY OWNER DOOR FRAME HDWR HD -A: PASSAGE SET 1 HD -E: DETEX SET HD -G: PASSAGE SET 2 _.J1 L- NO. ROOM NAME TYPE SIZE MAT'L MAT'L SET HINGES: (3) TA714 4-1/2" X4-1/2", US26D, MK CONTINUOUS (1) MCK-25HD, CL, MK HINGES: (1) TA714 4-1/2" X4-1/2", US26D, MK 100 RECEPTION/DISPENSE B 3x7' MTL/GLASS METAL HD -H, INSTALL NEW DOOR CLOSER MFG: MCKINNEY HINGES: MFG: MCKINNEY MFG: MCKINNEY PASSAGE SET: (1) CL3510 NZD, 626, RU EXIT DEVICE: (1) ED5200S VT957 M61, 630, RU SPRING (2) 1502 4-1/2" X 4-1/2", US26D, MK 103 PRE -CON A 3x7' WOOD METAL HD -G MFG: CORBIN RUSSWIN MFG: CORBIN RUSSWIN HINGES: MFG: MCKINNEY BOBRICK: 24X48 FRAMED MIRROR: NOTE: FLUSH VALVE ON WIDE SIDE OF 104 PRE -CON A 3x7' WOOD METAL HD -G WALL STOP: (1) 409, US32D, RO CYLINDER: (2) AS REQUIRED, 626, RU PASSAGE SET: (1) CL3510 NZD, 626, RU TOILET MOUNTED #B-165, OR EQUAL. 44" A.F.F. MAX. MFG: ROCKWOOD MFG: CORBIN RUSSWIN MFG: CORBIN RUSSWIN MIRROR TO BE MOUNTED AT A 105 REAR EXIT C; ETR 31x7' METAL METAL UPGRADE AS REQ'D HD -E HD -B: OFFICE LOCKSET WALL STOP: (1) 409, US32D, RO GOOSENECK MAXIMUM OF 40" AFF TO THE LSURFACE �\ �� c 106 RESTROOM A 3'x7 WOOD METAL HD -D HINGES: (3) TA714 4-1/2" X4 1/2", US26D, MK CLOSER: (1) CPS7500, 689, NO MFG: NORTON MFG: ROCKWOOD FAUCET & WRIST BLADES: SEE BOTTOM OF THE REFLECTIVE r \ MFG: MCKINNEY HD -H: STOREFRONT ENTRY PLUMBING SURFACE A B C D 107 RESTROOM A 3'x7' WOOD METAL HD -D OFFICE (1) CL3561 NZD, 626, RU THRESHOLD: (1) 1715AK, PE CONTINUOUS (1) MCK-12HD, CL, MK DRAWINGS FOR BOBRICK: WALL �� AW1 PC -5 GRADE ALUM. METAL EXIT AW1 PC -5 GRADE 108 BREAKROOM A 3'x7' WOOD METAL HD -C LOCK SET: MFG: CORBIN RUSSWIN MFG: PEMKO HINGES: MFG: MCKINNEY SPECIFICATIONS MOUNTED STAINLESS STEEL TOWEL WOOD DOOR STOREFRONT DOOR WITH WOOD DOOR 110 MANAGER'S OFFICE A 3'x7' WOOD METAL HD -B WALL STOP: (1) 409, US32D, RO GASKETING: (1) 2891AS, PE MFG: PEMKO DEADLATCH: (1) 4900, 628, AD 1 1/2" DIA. DISPENSER: BOB262 DOUBLE DOOR PANIC W/CENTER UTE MFG: ROCKWOOD MFG: ADAMS RITE GRAB BAR W/TEMPERED HARDWARE 111 CONSULT ROOM 1 A 3'x7' WOOD METAL HD -A HD -C: UTILITY PASSAGE SET RAIN GUARD: (1) 346C, PE PADDLE (1) 4591, 628, AD ACCESSIBLE SINK TO BE AT NO MORE THAN GLASS 112 CONSULT ROOM 2 A TV' WOOD METAL HD -A HINGES: (3) TA714 4-1/2" X 4-1/2", US260, MK MFG: PEMKO OPERATOR: MFG: ADAMS RITE o 34" TO THE RIM OF GENERAL DOOR NOTES MFG: MCKINNEY SWEEP: (1) 345ANB, PE CYLINDER: (1) AS REQUIRED, 626, RU b THE SINK OR 113 SUPPLY A 3x7' WOOD METAL HD -F PASSAGE SET: (1) CL3510 NZD, 626, RU MFG: PEMKO MFG: CORBIN RUSSWIN N LAVATORY 1) PAINT ALL DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES PT -1; OIL BASED; REFER TO SHEET A3. 114 DOCTOR'S OFFICE A 3x7' WOOD METAL HD -B MFG: CORBIN RUSSWIN HD -F: STORAGE SET PUSH/PULL (1) BF15747, US32D-316, RO � 2) USE KNOCKDOWN METAL DOOR FRAMES. SURFACE (1) 7500, 689, NO HINGES: (1) TA714 4-1/2" X 4-1/2", US26D, MK BAR: MFG: ROCKWOOD F.R.P. TO 48" 1-6 1-3 INSULATE HOT 3) UNDERCUT'SUPPLY' DOOR BOTTOM FOR MAKE-UP AIR EXHAUST FAN. 115 SUPPLY A 3x7' WOOD METAL HD -F CLOSER: MFG: NORTON MFG: MCKINNEY SURFACE (1) UNIJ7500 7786, 689, RO A.F.F. WATER SUPPLY 4) ALL NEW DOORS TO RECEIVE HINGES AS SPECIFIED. 5) ACCESSIBLE DOOR HARDWARE SHALL HAVE A SHAPE THAT IS EASYTO GRASP 116 SUPPLY BI -FOLD 3x7' WOOD METAL HD -J WALL STOP: (1) 409, US32D, RO SPRING (2) 1502 4-1/2" X 4-1/2", US26D, MK CLOSER: MFG: OD &DRAIN WITH ONE HAND AND DOES NOT REQUIRE TIGHT GRASPING, TIGHT PINCHING, OR 117 SUPPLY A 3x7 WOOD METAL HD -F MFG: ROCKWOOD HINGES: MFG: MCKINNEY 5AK, PE THRESHOLD: (1) : PE K, O MFG: PEMKO TWISTING OF THE WRIST TO OPERATE. HD -D: BATHROOM PRIVACY SET PASSAGE SET: (1) CL3510 NZD, 626, RU 6) DOOR HARDWARE CONTACT: GINA RAVENS, ASSAABLOY, CELL 314.402.1818 118 SUPPLY A 3x7 WOOD METAL HD -F HINGES: (3) TA714 4-1/2 X4-1/2 , US26D, MK MFG: CORBIN RUSSWIN NOTES: SWEEPS & SEALS TO BE MFG'S STANDARD TO MATCH FRAMING ELEVATION REFERENCE ONLY KEYING NOTES 119A SUPPLY A 3x7 WOOD METAL HD -F MFG: MCKINNEY PRIVACY SET: (1) CL3520 NZD, 626C, RU WALL STOP: (1) 409, US32D, RO MFG: ROCKWOOD SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY ALUMINUM DOOR SUPPLIER. 7 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 119B REAR DOOR C; ETR 3'x7' METAL METAL UPGRADE AS REM, HD -E MFG: CORBIN RUSSWIN HD -J: BI -FOLD SET 1. MANAGER'S OFFICE - PROVIDE MASTER KEY FOR ALL LOCKS THROUGHOUT SURFACE (1) 7500, 689, NO DOOR PULL: (1) BF 107 TB, US32D, RO 2. SUPPLY - KEYED TO MATCH CLOSER: MFG: NORTON MFG: ROCKWOOD ***VERIFY ALL KEYING WITH NATIONAL VISION, INC. CONSTRUCTION MANAGER WALL STOP: (1) 409, US32D, RO BI -FOLD TRACK (1) HF2 / 100A, PE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. MFG: ROCKWOOD & HDWE: MFG: PEMKO VERIFY FINAL FIXTURE & METAL ALL METAL PIPING SUPPLIED AND PIPING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLED BY AMERICA'S BEST 36"W UPPER SIGNAGE "RECEPTION" TEXT ON ALL METAL PIPING SUPPLIED & LOCATIONS WITH NVI FIXTURE CONTRACTOR --------- CABINET SUPPLIED CABINET VERIFY FINAL FIXTURE & METAL ALL METAL PIPING SUPPLIED PROVIDED BY COUNTER FASCIA PROVIDED SIM AND INSTALLED BY r ---- ----------- _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -- ________ ----------------- Ir ---- Ir ---- -7r ---- Ir----� I AND INSTALLED BY PIPING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLED BY AMERICA'S AMERICA'S BEST 1 AND INSTALLED BY AMERICA'S BEST FIXTURE 1 II I I I_ I I Ij AMERICA'S BEST & LOCATIONS WITH NVI BEST FIXTURE CONTRACTOR VENDOR A6 AMERICA'S BEST VENDOR CONTRACTOR r? 1 � L__11JL_=__JL__---JUi_ -- U ti 11 11 1 IVU I I lo V V V _JL____JI1 11 VENDOR ~ 4 r ------------ 7 r - - - - - - - - - - - -1 , - - - - - - - - - - - Q - ----------- -- 2 18" VERTICAL t=-7 I W GRAB BAR (IF = REQUIRED) _------------ N I J ------------------ ----J I- C7 H - w � w 54'3MIN1 U F.R0 TO 48" A.F.F. (9.P. N N y / ROLLING FILE r �r y = �? Cr.1 1/2" DIA. o r Z /� CABINETS, SUPPLIED u_ LL C7 N H °D O 3'-0" -0' GRAB BAR Q a o i� AND INSTALLED BY c(� o uOj o Z p PARAPHERNALIA w r i� AMERICA'S BEST 9 �' z r U Cr w SHELF, 15" MIN. cc - 4'-1" O Ir U � � z A.F.F., 6" MIN. � �L....L.1 IN Lid ILLLL]i � cQ Z ILL IL M BELOW GRAB BAR. n 111111 �i i- iA u �� i� u } g 0 SHELF TO BE 8" W o 0 0 CS 0 0 T X 5" D MIN. (IF 7"- REQUIRED) BOBRICK: DUAL -ROLL TOILET 29 81 1 2 81 29 rB1 INDICATED PORTION OF THE COUNTER AT THE SERVICE AREA SHALL B1 29 ALUM. &GLASS 2 1 B1 TISSUE DISPENSER: TYP. Np TYP TYP. BE NO MORE THAN THIRTY-FOUR INCHES (34") IN HEIGHT FOR USE BY STOREFRONT TYP. B2888 REFERENCE ONLY ELEVATION ELEVATION AN ENVIRONMENTALLY LIMITED PERSON OR EMPLOYEE. ELEVATION SYSTEM BEYOND TYP. TYP. 8)ELEVATION 9 1 11 ,_ „ SCALE E. 1 /4' - 1'-0 „- SCALE : 1 /4 - 1-0 , , 1 /4 - 1-0 SCALE .1/4 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.2315700 t 314.231.0916 Project Team: General Contractor. To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: Project Title: f M Cz 0 LL Cn -2 C CU aD -1--+ Cz C U (v U o 0 F_ ZW (1)0 o 06 C a. (Z .E u) �"O w �. (� Ca CO(D o0m co Orf CCS LU c: 0 _LmL0 "oM CSS O ( (0)+ 2 N The Professional Architect's seal affixed to this sheet applies only to the material and items shown on this sheet. All drawings, instruments or other documents not exhibiting this seal shall not be considered prepared by this architect, and this architect expressly disclaims any and all responsibility for such plans, drawings or documents not exhibiting this seal. This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: PARTITION TYPES/ELEVS/ DETAILS Project Number: Sheet Number. 11256.C18 Drawn By: ARS Issue Date: A6 September 20, 2011 TO EX/ST RTU -2 - NOTE 4 - PLAN HVAC PLAN A�y� SCALE: 1/4" = V-0" LEGEND EXISTING NEW WORK ® NEW TO EXIS77NG CONIVEC77ON HVAC GENERAL NOTES HVAC PLAN NOTES A. EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE BASED ON L IMI TED FIELD VERIFICATION BY OTHERS. K. DO NOT ATTACH ANYTHING TO DECK ABOVE. ATTACH TO STRUCTUI?E 0. e. BEAMS, CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST TO ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL JOISTS) ONL Y. DUCT HANGERS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL 1. PROVIDE NEW EXHAUST FAN AS NOTED ON PLANS AND SCHEDULED ON S17EET M2. EXPENSE TO TI -E- PROJECT. CODE. ALL CONNECTIONS TO JOISTS SHALL BE MADE AT THE TOP CORD. 2. PROVIDE 6"0 EXHAUST AIR DUCT UP TO GREENI-ECK ROOF CAP. CONTRACTOR B. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD VERIFICATION OF ALL EXISTING L. ALL DUCT DIMENSIONS INDICATED ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS. ALL SUPPLY SHALL FIELD VERIFY THAT THE LOCATION SHOWN IS A MINIMUM OF 15'-0" FROM CONDI TIONS PRIOR TO SUBMI TTING HIS BID. NO ADDI TIONAL COOPENSA TION SHALL BE LINED WITH 1-112- ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINER OR WRAPPED WITH 2- ANY OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE. ". WILL BE PROVIDED FOR ANY EXTRAS DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO THICK FIRE RETARDANT FIBERGLASS WI TH A REINFORCED ALUMINJM FOIL JACKET J. CONTRACTOR SHALL UNDERCUT DOOR 3/4 VISIT THE PROJECT SITE PRIOR TO SUBMITTING THE BID. ANY DISCREPANCIES AND SHALL BE APPROVED FOR USE BY SMACNA AND NAIMA . RETIWN AIR TRANSFER 4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL NEW PROL IPHIX IMT550C ThERMOSTA T IN TI- E' SHALL BE IMMEDIA TEL Y REPORTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR RESOLUTION. DUCTS AND RETURN DUCTWORK W177 -11N 10 FEET OF THE UNIT FAN SHALL BE LINED " LOCATION INDICA 7ED. PLEASE CONTACT PAUL HARRIS AT OFFICE- (978)692-JJ75x 11 OR CELL: (978)549-8410 TO ORDER THEM. THE C. CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH DEMOL I TION WORK PRIOR TO WI TH 1 ACOUSTICAL DUCT L INER. BIDDING AND START OF WORK. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO DEMOLISH ALL M. AT THE START OF CONSTRUCTION, 771E MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT INSTALL ING CONTRACTOR NEEDS TO CONTACT DAVID CARPUS AT (770)-827-5274 EXISTING AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION/CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK. AND RUN TEST ALL EXISTING HVAC UNITS DESIGNATED FOR REUSE. CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO THERMOSTAT INSTALLATION AND CABLE CONNECTION. CONTRACTOR TO D. ALL WORK SHALL BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE SHALL INFORM THE ENGINEER OF ANY NECESSARY REPAIRS FOR APPROVAL IN A FIELD VERIFY CONTROLS ON EXISTING ROOFTOP UVI T AND PROVIDE ANY CONTROL GOVERNMENT AN9 LOCAL CODES. TIMEL Y MANNER, AS TO NOT DELA Y THE PROJECT OPENING DA TE. MODULES/BOARDS AS REQUIRED TO INTERFACE #1 TV THE AEW 77ERMOSTA TS. E. MECHANICAL CON7RACTOR SHALL FIELD COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR N. TENANT'S CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FIELD VERIFICATION OF 5. EXISTING YORK, MODEL NUMBER DM048COONN2KAA 1A, 4.0 TON ROOFTOP UVI T TO FOR ALL POWER REQUIREMENTS. ALL UTILITY RUNS AND/OR OTHER IAFROVEMENTS LOCATED ON ThE PREMISES REMAIN. CONTRACTOR SHALL BALANCE UNIT TO PROVIDE 1600 CFM OF SUPPLY F. THE CON7RACTOR SHALL COOPERATE WITH THE OTHER TRADES SO THAT THE PRIOR TO BIDDING. TENANT 'S CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR AIR AND JJ5 CFM OF OUTDOOR AIR. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION. INSTALLA TION OF ALL EQUIPAMENT MA Y BE PROPERL Y COORDINA TED. ALL COSTS RELATING TO THE RELOCATION OF, DAMAGE TO, REPAIR OF ANY 6. EXISTING YORK, MODEL NUMBER DM048CO0VZKAA 1A, 4.0 TON ROOFTOP UNIT TO G. ALL EQUIPAMENT FURNISHED SHALL FIT THE SPACE AVAILABLE WITH CONNECTIONS EXISTING UTIL 1 TY RUNS AND/OR IAPROVEMENTS WHICH ARE DAMAGED AS A RESUL T REMAIN. CONTRACTOR SHALL BALANCE UNIT TO PROVIDE 1600 CFM OF SUPPL Y IN THE REQUIRED L OCA TIONS AND #1 TV ADEQUA TE SPACE FOR OPERA TING AND OF 7ENANT 'S WORK IN OR AROUND 77,E PREMISES. AIR AND JJ5 CFM OF OUTDOOR AIR. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION. SERVICING. THE DRAWINGS ARE GENERALLY DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE THE 0. ALL ROOFING WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED BY LANDLORD'S APPROVED ROOFING 7. EXISTING YORK, MODEL NUMBER DM048C00N0KAA M, 4.0 TON ROOFTOP UNIT TO INTENT OF THE INSTALLATION WHILE THE SPECIFICATIONS AND EQUIPMENT LIST CONTRACTOR A T TENANT 'S EXPENSE, IF REQUIRED IN LEASE OR TENANT REMAIN. CONTRACTOR SHALL BALANCE UNIT TO PROVIDE 1600 CFM OF SUPPLY DENOTE 771E TYPE AND QUAL I TY OF MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP TO BE USED. CRTI TERIA MAAVAL . AIR AND 340 CFM OF OUTDOOR AIR. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCA TION. TAE DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE SCALED FOR EXACT MEASUREMENTS. WHERE A P. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TENANT WITH A WRITTEN ONE (1) YEAR 8. EXPOSED DUCTWORK SHALL BE INSTALLED TIGHT TO THE BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE. CONFLICT EXISTS BETWEEN THE DRAWINGS AND THE SPECIFICATIONS, T1 -E HIGHER MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY ON ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT PROVIDED AND / OR AND/OR MORE COSTLY STANDARD WILL APPLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROMPTLY INSTALLED. 77-E WARRANTY SHALL INCLUDE ALL LABOR, MATERIALS AND 7HREE NOTIFY THE ENGINEER WHOSE DECISION SHALL BE FINAL. NO ALLOWANCE WILL (3) ROUTINE SERVICES INCLUDING FILTER CHANGES DURING A ONE (1) YEAR BE MADE SUBSEOUENTL Y IN THIS REGARD ON BEHALF OF THE CONTRACTOR AFTER PERIOD. AWARD OF THE CONTRACT. Q. AT THE COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION AN NEBB, AABC OR T488 CERTIFIED AIR H. COORDINATE DUCT ROUTING AND HEIGHTS WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR. VERIFY BALANCE REPORT SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO 771E ENGINEER AND LANDLORD. TIME ALL CLEARANCES BEFORE STARTING WORK. BALANCING kVST BE COMPLETED BY AN INDEPE7VDENT, THIRD PARTY CON7RACTOR 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT AS WITH NO TIES TO THE INSTALLING CONTRACTORS. REQUIRED TO CONFORM THE STRUCTt'RE-, AVOID OBSTRUCTIONS, PRESERVE CEILING khrkoKMI HEIGHTS AND HEADROOM AND MAKE ALL EQUIPMENT REQUIRING MAINTENANCE OR HVAC DEMOL I TION N01ES.- ev, REPAIR ACCESSIBLE. A. VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONOI TIONS IN THE FIELD BEFORE BID. NOTIFY J. ALL DUCT CON ECTIONS TO HVAC EQUIPMENT MUST BE MADE WITH FLEXIBLE ARCHITECT lUkEDIA TEL Y IF CONFLICT EXISTS. CON7RACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO m NewYrcrk ■ Orrolw ■ I=ArWW m CONNECTORS. DEMOLISH ALL EXISTING AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLA TION/CONS7RUCTION OF NEW 800.581-0963 www.schnadae xWn WORK. LAWREN GROUP won Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0818 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professions`` R0 C �,,ti No 2 STATE OF r 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title 1 ` N co Cz 70 L- 0 O U- -6 C/)O +MJ � C/) Cn C C/) U Cz — c 0 Cv 0 ZC/) o - LJJ 0 CZ U C/)> W.�.� °° V Cz � Im W O O 6C") CTS 0.. � � N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: HVAC PLAN Project Number. Sheet Number: 11256.C18 Drawn By: JRE Issue Date: M 1 September 20, 2011 DIFFUSER DETAIL DUCTWORK DETAILS SCHEDULES VOLUME DAMPER LOCA TED IN ACCESSIBLE LOCA 770N. PROVIDE ACCESS DOOR OR CABLE OPERA TOR IF NO 1 j ACCESSIBLE. MAX. OF 12" TO BRANCH COIVNEC77ON UNLESS N07FD 07HERWISE GAL VANIZED SHEET I METAL DUCT ' FIBERGLASS INSULA 77ON PER SPECIFICA 77ONS - OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER A T DIFFUSER INSULA TE DIFFUSER BACK AND SEAL WITH VAPOR BARRIER TAPE USE RIGID GAL VAN/ZED 90 DEGREE ELBOW METAL STRAP CLAMP (TYPICAL) 2 PLACES INSULA TED FLEX/BLE DUCT (MIN. 2' MAX. 5' NO MORE 77 -IAN ONE 90' BEND) 1RANSI T/ON FI T77NG AS REQUIRED I SUPPL Y A/R DIFFUSER I TYPICAL DIFFUSER CONNECTION NOT TO SCALE SYMBOL LEGEND ►11 7URNIN VANES A 15:*0 LESS AFB 014 x TRANSFORMATION 90' ELBOW 45' ELBOW SIMILAR SUPPLY OR RETURN WYE (RECTANGULAR DUCT) RETURN AIR BRANCH FITTING AIii IR15' OR LESS — FLOW EXPANSION THREE 7URN/NG VANES NO THROAT RADIUS TV TURNIP VANE SHORT RADIUS 90' ELBOW TAKE -OFF USE ONLY IN AREAS WHERE SPACE IS LIMITED DUCTWORK DETAILS NOT TO SCALE 90 FIVE SECTION ELBOW D' 90 BRANCH TAKE—OFF 41:1F,'ALWr4'Ao CONTRACTION FULL RADIUS FULL RADIUS ELBOW TAKE -OFF 45 7HREF SECT/ON ELBOW 45 BRANCH TAKE—OFF TYPICAL ROUND DUCT FITTINGS NOT TO SCALE DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS MARK SYM B OL_S LOCATION CLG. TYPE MANUFAC. H E A T I N G— V E N T I L A T I N G— A I R C 0 N D I T 1 0 N I N G SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ---�'- STEAMLOW PRESSURE) STEAM MEDIUM PRESSURE) NA AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVE ® SUPPLY OR FRESH AIR DUCT G-1 RETURN/TRANS. CEILING AC TILE TITUS (SA OR FA) 1, 2 STEAM HIGH PRESSURE RETURN PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE (PRV) NA RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT - - CONDENSATE LOW PRESSURE) OR ® SAFETY RELIEF VALVE -/- -/- CONDENSATE MEDIUM PRESSURE) 60 1050 GREENHECK (RA OR EA) EF -3 SOUND TRAP CONDENSATE HIGH PRESSURE BLOW OFF VALVE —HWS— HOT WATER SUPPLY (HEATING) —{� R F AND T TRAP (CAP. #/HR) 115 1 CFM I SIZE SUPPLY REGISTER OR GRILLE (R OR G) - -HWR- - HOT WATER RETURN (HEATING) �— THERMOSTATIC TRAP —EG— ETHYLENE GLYCOL SUPPLY S.P. STATIC PRESSURE I CFM RETURN REGISTER OR GRILLE (R OR G) - -EG- - ETHYLENE GLYCOL RETURN- CIRCUIT SETTER FLOW CONTROL VALVE SIZE CFM I SIZE FRESH AIR INTAKE (FA) —CWS— CHILLED WATER SUPPLY — AIR BLEEDER VALVE (RADIANT PANEL) - -CWR- - CHILLED WATER RETURN —� AIR ELIMINATOR CONDENSATE VA CUUM ROUND CEILING DIFFUSER SUPPLY (SUPPLY) —D ,GE AUTOMATIC BALANCING VALVE ROUND CEI(SUPPLY AND RETURN) DIFFUSER —H— HUMIDIFICATION LINE��- SOLENOID VALVE (REFRIGERANT) ( -»� —Fos— FUEL OIL SUPPLY THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE (REFR.) SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSER —FOR— FUEL OIL RETURN BACK PRESSURE VALVE (SUPPLY) - -FOV- - FUEL OIL VENT— SIGHT BASS -»✓ SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSER (SUPPLY AND RETURN) _. -G — GAS LINE --�— ROUND DUCT RISER SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSER —RL— REFRIGERANT LIQUID LINE FC_t —~ FAN COIL UNIT AND MARK THREE WAY THROW —RS— REFRIGERANT SUCTION LINE �'}' SQUARE CEILING DIFFUSER UHUH-1 TWO WAY THROW —RD— REFRIGERANT HOT GAS DISCHARGE UNE (I—j UNIT HEATER -PROPELLER TYPE & MARK `U C CONDENSER WATER GRAVITY DAMPER �CUH-t-t CABINET UNIT HEATER & MARK - -CR- - CONDENSER WATER RETURN SMD MOTORIZED DAMPER —BBO— BOILER BLOW OFF FrH FIN TUBE, MARK AND CAPACITY -I--}FD FIRE DAMPER —ES— EXHAUST STEAM C-1 CONVECTOR AND MARK -C SSD SMOKE DAMPER -I*— CONCENTRIC REDUCER rU_v_-11 UNIT VENTILATOR AND MARK { = -FD.so FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER 9 6 RECTANGULAR DUCT BD BASEBOARD DIFFUSER _ ECCENTRIC REDUCER FIRST FIGURE IS SIDE SHOWN — UNION • ROUND DUCT -Y6 STRAINER CANVAS CONNECTION 1� HEATING RISER NUMBER —+� EXPANSION JOINT VOLUME DAMPER (ELEV AND PLAN) r�1 EXHAUST FAN RISER NUMBER jI THERMOMETER 7� TURNING VANES SR BASEBOARD RADIATION Q PRESSURE GAGE 5 REMOTE SENSOR EXTRACTOR T THERMOSTAT ►11 7URNIN VANES A 15:*0 LESS AFB 014 x TRANSFORMATION 90' ELBOW 45' ELBOW SIMILAR SUPPLY OR RETURN WYE (RECTANGULAR DUCT) RETURN AIR BRANCH FITTING AIii IR15' OR LESS — FLOW EXPANSION THREE 7URN/NG VANES NO THROAT RADIUS TV TURNIP VANE SHORT RADIUS 90' ELBOW TAKE -OFF USE ONLY IN AREAS WHERE SPACE IS LIMITED DUCTWORK DETAILS NOT TO SCALE 90 FIVE SECTION ELBOW D' 90 BRANCH TAKE—OFF 41:1F,'ALWr4'Ao CONTRACTION FULL RADIUS FULL RADIUS ELBOW TAKE -OFF 45 7HREF SECT/ON ELBOW 45 BRANCH TAKE—OFF TYPICAL ROUND DUCT FITTINGS NOT TO SCALE DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS MARK SERVICE LOCATION CLG. TYPE MANUFAC. CATALOG NUMBER REMARKS D-1 SUPPLY CEILING AC TILE TITUS TMSA X 24x24 3 26 AG -75 1 D-2 SUPPLY DUCT NA TITUS 300 R L 8 6 1 26 129 W G-1 RETURN/TRANS. CEILING AC TILE TITUS 50F X X 3 26 1, 2 G-2 RETURN DUCT NA TITUS 350R L 8 8 1 26 115 NOTES: 1. SEE PLAN FOR NECK SIZE. 2. WITH 1/2" x 1/2" x 1" CORE EXHAUST FANS MARK LOCATION SERVICE CFM EXT. S.P. (IN W. G.) SONES MOTOR DATA RPM MFR. REMARKS HP VOLTS PH CYC. EF -1 CEILING RESTROOM 100 0.50 2.8 129 W 115 1 60 1050 GREENHECK MODEL SP—B150 (1) EF -2 CEILING RESTROOM 100 0.50 2.8 129 W 115 1 60 1050 GREENHECK MODEL SP—B150 (1) EF -3 CEILING MOP SINK 100 0.50 2.8 129 W 115 1 60 1050 GREENHECK MODEL SP -6150 (2) NOTES: 1. FAN SHALL BE INTERLOCKED WITH LIGHT SWITCH, HAVE INTEGRAL BACKDRAFT DAMPER, SPEED CONTROL, ROOF CURB, AND ROOF CURB CAP. 2. FAN SHALL BE INTERLOCKED WITH WALL SWITCH, HAVE INTEGRAL BACKDRAFT DAMPER, SPEED CONTROL, ROOF CURB, AND ROOF CURB CAP. EXHAUST FAN DETAIL U77LI TY CURB RUBBER—IN—SHEAR V/BRA 77ON ISOLATORS EXHAUST FAN I EXHAUST DISCHARGE CAP W/ BIRD SCREEN BACKDRAFT DAMPER EXHAUST FAN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE ROOFLINE 57FEL ✓0/ST EXHAUST DUCT BY MECH. CON7R. (VER/FY ROU77NG AND SIZES /N FIELD) khnKkel ■ NewYark ■ Onallm ■ L=Ang" ■ 800.5814M W W W.schnndwLcwn LAWREN GROUP - Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0816 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: �O\C E NsF %�'�''i 4L C9 No 2 '; STATE OF '�/j �CORIDp'�•''����� 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: 1' - ti N CO as .O LL L � o ■�-� Ca Cn cn C U C z Clio>,OW 5 CZ W U U)> U) 100 ■ tfi CD VCZ �m co v o- U 2N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date sheet Tlae: HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS Project Number: Sheet Number: 11256.C18 Drawn By: JRE Issue Date: September 20, 2011 covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. 1.10 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE A. Submit manufacturer's warrant and ensure forms have been f111ed out in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. B. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for pumps. C. Provide three year manufacturers warranty for solid state ignition modules. D. Provide five year manufacturers warranty for compressors, heat exchangers. condensing units, and electronic air cleaners. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The manufacturers listed are listed to set minimum standards for quality, design, and functionality. The products of other manufacturers may be submitted, at the Contractor's option, during shop drawing review unless indicated otherwise. The products of other manufacturers shall meet or exceed all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor accepts all responsibility for costs and coordination issues arising out of the substitution of materials or equipment, and the coordination of such substitutions with all other contractors and subcontractors. B. The Contractor may use any of the following ductwork, piping or insulation materials at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and any utlllty company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Examine the Contract Documents as a whole for the work of other trades. Coordinate all work accordingly. B. Promptly report to the Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of the work, which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work. C. Plan, lay out, and coordinate the work with all trades well enough in advance so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference to work that has not been completed and work that is in progress. Inform all trades of openings required for the work and provide all special frames, sleeves, and anchor bolts required. The HVAC system layout may be altered to suit the conditions with engineer approval, prior to the Installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responslbtllty. D. Perform all work in conformity with the Contract Documents and afford other trades reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work. Properly connect and coordinate this work with the work of other trades at such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with their work. E. All roofing penetrations shall be flashed and weather sealed by the roofing manufacturer's authorized roofing contractor at this Contractor's expense. This Contractor shall contract with the factory authorized roofing contractor for the specific roofing system applicable to this Project. The use of an unauthorized roof in contractor ma result in removal and re lacement of thegpenetration systems at this Contractor'sp expense. F. All temperature control wiring, thermostat wiring, damper interlock wiring, control panel interlock wiring and miscellaneous low voltage wiring associated with the equipment furnished or installed under this contract shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor or his sub -contractor. All wiring Installed under this contract shall be in full compliance with the National Electrical Code, all State and local codes and requirements of the Electrical Specifications for this project. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on the Drawings. B. Verify all equipment locations prior to rough -in. Maintain adequate equipment service clearance par manufacturer and code. C. Verify routing of all ductwork and piping in field prior to fabrlcatlon or Installation. Verify adequate clearance with structure, light fixtures, and ceiling heights. D. Verify that proper fuel and power supply is available for connection. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install all ductwork, pipe, equipment, and accessories to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using material• and methods speclfled. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide tests as necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status, and suitable o eratlon of each s st m. Tests shall be conducted p y e under the supervision of the Architect. 3.05 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean fire suppression parts to remove harmful materials. B. Clean exposed surfaces of all ductwork pipe, equipment, and accessories of all dirt, debris, splatter, and other d leterious materials. Follow the manufacturer's e recommendations for cleaning as applicable. C. Repair or replace damaged ductwork, pipe, equipment, and acceasoriea, as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Architect, where marring or disfigurement has occurred. All pipe, equipment, and accessories shall be new. 3.06 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: At project closeout, provide one printed copy and one electronic copy of project record drawings to the Owner. Information contained on project record drawings shall include, as a minimums 1. Actual locations of all equipment, ductwork, air inlets/outlets, accessories, etc. 2. Actual routing of ductwork with sizes and elevations. 3. Actual locations of control devices including valves and volume dampers. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: At project closeout, submit to the Architect two copies of descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data for all hvac equipment, control systems, accessories, and materials used. Include maintenance procedures, intervals, and parts list of each item installed under this contract. Include all manufacturer's guarantees and warranties. C. Maintenance Materials: At project closeout, furnish to the Owner the fol lowing: 1. One set of replacement filters for all hvac equipment. 2. The maintenance contract for the hvac system, if applicable. D. Test Reports: At project closeout, submit to the Architect two copies of the following: 1. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report END OF SECTION SECTION 230503 - TESTING, ADJUSTING. ANO BALANCING FOR HWAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of otr systems. 1. AIr handling units; Packa ed heating and/or cooling equipment; Fans. ?Exhaust and supply); Coils; Terminal equipment; Air inlets and outlets. (Diffusers, grilles, louvers, etc.) B. Measurement of final operating condition of HNAC systems. C. Independent agency requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. Provide TAB Agency quallflcatlons. B. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies In systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Submit to the Construction Manager within two weeks after completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing. 2. Provide reports in bound manuals, complete with index page and indexing tuba, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and Indicating thermostat and equipment locations. 3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 5. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name, address and telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Project: Name; location; Engineer; Contractor, Report date. 1.03 WARRANTY A. The Balancing Contractor shall be prepared to return to the site at no additional cost to re -adjust air quantities as required to provide uniform temperatures, eliminate drafts and objectionable noises during the first year of occupancy, including one full heating and one full cooling season, after the acceptance of the final balancing report. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance In accordance with one of the following: SECTION 230000 - HVAC SAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPLICABILITY A. This section supplements all sections of the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Speciflcatlons for Division 23 and shall apply to all Heating, Venttlatton, A1r�ondltlontng, and phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the Refrlgeratton Systems. Drawings, or required to provide o complete installation 3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting of approved HVAC systems. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. "Work" (s hereby defined as, "The construction and Balancing. services required by the Contract Documents whether Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, completed or partially completed and includes all labor, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to materials, equipment, and services provided or to be Substantial Completion of the Project. provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with Ilfe obligations. The work may constitute the whole or a safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, Bart of the project." B. Furnish" is hereby defined as. "To supply and deliver, and Inspection procedures with the authorities having unload, and inspect for damage." C. "Install" is hereby defined as, "To unpack, assemble, TAB Agency Qualifications: erect, apply, place, flniah, cure, protect, clean, 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, connect, and place into operation into the work.' D. "Provide" is hereby defined as, "To furnish and with a minimum of five years experience. install." E. "Connect" is hereby defined as, "To bring service to the a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council; upon equipment and make final attachment including necessary completion submit AABC National Performance ductwork, �iping, wiring, etc." F. "Concealed is hereby defined as, "Hidden from sight In b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings embedded Bureau. in construction, In crawl spaces, or buried. G. "Exposed' Is hereby defined as, "Not installed Bureau of National Energy Management undergground nor concealed as defined by the Institute. specifications.' H. "Drawings is hereby defined as, "All plans, details, third party balancing contractor with no equipment schedules, diagrams, sketches, etc. issued for financial, common owners or other ties to the the construction of the work." 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Perform work in accordance with the applicable Building Code, Electrical Code, Fire Code, Mechanical Code, 3.02 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES Plumbing Code, Energy Code, and all other applicable Air Handling Systems: Air Outlets and Inlets; Hydronic codes, amendments, and ordinances. Also perform all Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 15 percent of work In accordance with the Americans with Disabilities design. Act (ADA) and the Authority Hlaving Jurisdiction (AHJ) A. including Fire Morshal(s). B. Perform work in accordance with Landlord requirements, including any Tenant Criteria Manuals and Lease B. Exhibits, where applicable. C. Perform work in accordance with the applicable utility companies serving the project. Make all arrangements 3.04 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE with the utility companies for proper coordination of Adjust air handling and distribution systema to provide the work. D. Recognized Standards: Design, manufacture, testing and quantities. method of installation of all apparatus and materials Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube furnished under the requirements of these Spec iflcatlons traverse of entire cross sectfonol area of duct. shall conform to the latest publications or standard Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. rules of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.), Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM), temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. American National Standards Institute (ANSI and Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities i n I I ctrical Code NEC Notional Fire Protection Nlat o a E e ( ) , only to extend that adjustments do not create Association (NEPA), American Society of Pleating, objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASPRAE), control by duct internal devices such as dampers and and the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors splitters. Do not use diffuser, grille or register National Association (SMACNA). E. The Contract Documents shall take precedence where the plans do not indicate duct mounted devices. Contract Documents exceed code, Landlord, utility, or Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of tan recognized standards requirements. 1.04 PERMITS AND FEES A. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the work under this Contract shall be G. obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor is responsible to obtain, fully percent loading of filters. understand, and coordinate the work with the complete Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, set of Contract Documents. Any required corrections, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions in including all associated costs, arising from issues all operating modes as indicated in the sequence of caused by the Contractor's failure to understand and/or control. coordinate the work with the complete set of Contract Measure temperature conditions across outside air, Documents are the Contractor's sole responsibility. B. Work under these sections is diagrammatic unless Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements indicated otherwise and is intended to convey the scope and balance at extreme conditions and at all of work and Indicate the general arrangement of intermediate operating conditions specified in the ductwork, piping, equipment, and accessories. Follow sequence of control. Balance variable volume systems at these drawings in laying out the work and verify spaces maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air for the installation of these materials and equipment. flow rate, full heating. Wherever a question exists as to the exact intended location of ductwork, piping, or equipment, obtain Equipment Requiring Testin Adjusting, and Balancing instructions from the Architect before proceeding with (if present on the project: the work. C. Notify the Architect for resolution if a discrepancy is All Packaged Heating and/or Cooling Equipment; All discovered within the Contract Documents. Failure of Coil; All Heat Exchangers; Terminal Heat Transfer the Contractor to notify the Architect of discrepancies Units; Air Terminal Units; Air Inlets and Outlets shall result in the resolution becoming the Contractor's A. responsibility and subject to the Architect's review enc' possible rejection. Should the Architect reject a discrepancy resolution of which they were not notified. the Contractor is fully responsible to correct the installation, including all associated costs, until approval of the installation fe given by the Architect. 1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify all existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Any existing condltlons indicated In the Contract Electric Motors and drives: Documents are based on information drawings provided by 1. Manufacturer; Model/Frame; HP/BHP; Phase, voltage, others and possibly limited field verification. The amperage; nameplate, actual, no load; RPM; Service Contractor shall adjust for actual field conditions at factor; Sheave Make/Size/Bore. no additional expense to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall visit the project site, review driven RPM; Driven sheave, diameter and RPM; Belt, existing conditions against the Contract Documents, and size and quantity; familiarize himself with the work prior to bidding and Coolin and Heatin Coils: 9 9 start of the work. By signing the Contract, the 1. Identification/number; Manufacturer Contractor acknowledges the Bite visit has been 2. Air flow, design and actual completed and the existing condltlons are accepted. D. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of major 4. Entering and leaving air DB and WB temperature, discrepancies to writing so the appropriate design and actual modifications to the design can be made without delay to 5. Water flow, design and actual (if applicable) the project. The Contractor assumes full responsibility 6. Water pressure drop, design and actual (if of adjusting for discrepancies of which the Architect is applicable) not informed. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Sh Drawin s: oP 9 D. 1. Furnish the Architect shop drawing portfolios containing names of manufacturer and cut sheets of equipment to be used on the project. Use manufacturer's specification sheets identified by number lndlcated on drawings or schedules. Indicate catalog number on the cut sheets. As E. applicable, provide construction data, weight and dimensional data, voltage ratings, performance data, listing data, pump curves, fan curves and sound data as port of the shop drawing submittal. 2. Submittals are reviewed only for general compliance with the Contract Documents. Dimensions, quantities and details are not checked during submittal review. Review of the submittals does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing all materials, equipment and accessories necessary for a complete and operational system meeting the requirements of the pro1'ect and the intent of the Contract Documents. The responsibility for coordination of substituted materials and equipment lies solely with the substituting Contractor. 3. Electrical Characteristics: Verify that proper power supply is available prior to ordering equipment. Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supply and inform Engineer of any deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verlflcatlon of proper power supply voltage and any product returns or damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. B. Project Record Documents: Provide as specified. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. D. Teat Reports: Provide as specified. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products speclfled In this section with minimum flue years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section, with minimum five years experience. C. Products: 1. Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. All equipment and components shall be free of all rust/corrosion or any visible damage. All items not complying with this requirement shalt be replaced without any change in the Contract amount. E. Equipment performance and accessories shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and specified herein. Inclusion in both locations is not a prerequisite to inclusion in the Contract. Equipment and accessories specified in either location shall be included in the Contract. Provide all necessary accessories and connections as required for a complete, functional system, including all required components reasonably inferred to as necessary although such components may or may not be specifically indicated in the Contract Documents. F. Code or utlllty company requirements shall supersede any conflicting requirements of this section. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Rooftop Equipment: Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in place, ready for immediate installation of units. B. Protect inaulotion from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. C. Protect dampers and accessories from damage to operating linkages, blades and finishes. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain In place until lnstallatlon. E. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-prcof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. 1.10 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE A. Submit manufacturer's warrant and ensure forms have been f111ed out in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. B. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for pumps. C. Provide three year manufacturers warranty for solid state ignition modules. D. Provide five year manufacturers warranty for compressors, heat exchangers. condensing units, and electronic air cleaners. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The manufacturers listed are listed to set minimum standards for quality, design, and functionality. The products of other manufacturers may be submitted, at the Contractor's option, during shop drawing review unless indicated otherwise. The products of other manufacturers shall meet or exceed all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor accepts all responsibility for costs and coordination issues arising out of the substitution of materials or equipment, and the coordination of such substitutions with all other contractors and subcontractors. B. The Contractor may use any of the following ductwork, piping or insulation materials at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and any utlllty company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Examine the Contract Documents as a whole for the work of other trades. Coordinate all work accordingly. B. Promptly report to the Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of the work, which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work. C. Plan, lay out, and coordinate the work with all trades well enough in advance so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference to work that has not been completed and work that is in progress. Inform all trades of openings required for the work and provide all special frames, sleeves, and anchor bolts required. The HVAC system layout may be altered to suit the conditions with engineer approval, prior to the Installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responslbtllty. D. Perform all work in conformity with the Contract Documents and afford other trades reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work. Properly connect and coordinate this work with the work of other trades at such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with their work. E. All roofing penetrations shall be flashed and weather sealed by the roofing manufacturer's authorized roofing contractor at this Contractor's expense. This Contractor shall contract with the factory authorized roofing contractor for the specific roofing system applicable to this Project. The use of an unauthorized roof in contractor ma result in removal and re lacement of thegpenetration systems at this Contractor'sp expense. F. All temperature control wiring, thermostat wiring, damper interlock wiring, control panel interlock wiring and miscellaneous low voltage wiring associated with the equipment furnished or installed under this contract shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor or his sub -contractor. All wiring Installed under this contract shall be in full compliance with the National Electrical Code, all State and local codes and requirements of the Electrical Specifications for this project. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on the Drawings. B. Verify all equipment locations prior to rough -in. Maintain adequate equipment service clearance par manufacturer and code. C. Verify routing of all ductwork and piping in field prior to fabrlcatlon or Installation. Verify adequate clearance with structure, light fixtures, and ceiling heights. D. Verify that proper fuel and power supply is available for connection. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install all ductwork, pipe, equipment, and accessories to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using material• and methods speclfled. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide tests as necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status, and suitable o eratlon of each s st m. Tests shall be conducted p y e under the supervision of the Architect. 3.05 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean fire suppression parts to remove harmful materials. B. Clean exposed surfaces of all ductwork pipe, equipment, and accessories of all dirt, debris, splatter, and other d leterious materials. Follow the manufacturer's e recommendations for cleaning as applicable. C. Repair or replace damaged ductwork, pipe, equipment, and acceasoriea, as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Architect, where marring or disfigurement has occurred. All pipe, equipment, and accessories shall be new. 3.06 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: At project closeout, provide one printed copy and one electronic copy of project record drawings to the Owner. Information contained on project record drawings shall include, as a minimums 1. Actual locations of all equipment, ductwork, air inlets/outlets, accessories, etc. 2. Actual routing of ductwork with sizes and elevations. 3. Actual locations of control devices including valves and volume dampers. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: At project closeout, submit to the Architect two copies of descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data for all hvac equipment, control systems, accessories, and materials used. Include maintenance procedures, intervals, and parts list of each item installed under this contract. Include all manufacturer's guarantees and warranties. C. Maintenance Materials: At project closeout, furnish to the Owner the fol lowing: 1. One set of replacement filters for all hvac equipment. 2. The maintenance contract for the hvac system, if applicable. D. Test Reports: At project closeout, submit to the Architect two copies of the following: 1. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report END OF SECTION SECTION 230503 - TESTING, ADJUSTING. ANO BALANCING FOR HWAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of otr systems. 1. AIr handling units; Packa ed heating and/or cooling equipment; Fans. ?Exhaust and supply); Coils; Terminal equipment; Air inlets and outlets. (Diffusers, grilles, louvers, etc.) B. Measurement of final operating condition of HNAC systems. C. Independent agency requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. Provide TAB Agency quallflcatlons. B. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies In systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Submit to the Construction Manager within two weeks after completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing. 2. Provide reports in bound manuals, complete with index page and indexing tuba, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and Indicating thermostat and equipment locations. 3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 5. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name, address and telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Project: Name; location; Engineer; Contractor, Report date. 1.03 WARRANTY A. The Balancing Contractor shall be prepared to return to the site at no additional cost to re -adjust air quantities as required to provide uniform temperatures, eliminate drafts and objectionable noises during the first year of occupancy, including one full heating and one full cooling season, after the acceptance of the final balancing report. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance In accordance with one of the following: SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 (NERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct inaulotion. B. Duct liner. C. Supply, return or exhaust ducts in ceiling spaces. 1.02 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after lnstallatlon for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NEPA 255, or UL 723. B. Manufacturer: Knouf Fiber Gloss; Johns Manville Corporation; Owens Corning Corp.; CertainTeed Corporation. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.31 at 75 degNs a F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Po a m (0.02 perm inch), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. C. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kroft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. D. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. 2.03 DUCT LINER A. Insulation: Incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071; flexible blanket, rigid board, and preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with acrylic polymer shown to be fungus and bacteria resistant by testing to ASTM G 21. 1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F. 2. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F. 3. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Slde for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum. 4. Minimum Noise Reduction CoeffIc1onto: a. 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.30. b. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45. c. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.60. d. 2 inch Thickness: 0.70. B. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardont type. C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad or impact applied with integral, or press -on head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install In accordance with manufacturer's Instructions and NAIMA National Insulation Standards. B. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier acket. 2. nsulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. D. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure inaulotion without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Llit duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. E. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metol and Flexible for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse oints. 4.al liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 3.02 SCI-EEDULES A. The Contractor may use any of the following insulating materials, at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and utility company requirements. Verlflcatlon of compliance of the selected Insulating material and thickness with all State and local codes and utility company requirements is the sole responslbllity of the installing Contractor. B. Supply air ducts in ceiling spaces: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 2 inches thick. 2. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation: 1-1/2 inches thick. END OF SECTION SECTION 233100 - NVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Nonmetal ductwork. C. Duct cleaning. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Nb variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permieaion. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts, only after approval of the Engineer. B. Report all conflicts with structure or other obstructions, prior to fabrication of any ductwork. Suitable adjustments in the sizes of ducts shall be accommodated without any additional expense to the Owner. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, porticulare such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work for all systema. No ductwork shall be fabricated until engineer approved shop drawings have been received by the Contractor. Identify on ductwork shop drawings any devlattons In sizes or shapes made necessary by the obstructions of other trades. B. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK] - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NEPA 90A, NEPA 906, and NEPA 96 standards. B. Code or utility company requirements shall supersede any conflictin re uirements of this Section. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSg q A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized S I cts: Hot -di ed alvanized steel tee Du sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS TypepB, with G90/Z275 coating. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS, cold -rolled commercial steel. C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T651 or of equivalent strength. D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: 1. The Contractor may use any of the following ductwork materials, at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected ductwork material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. 2. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F. d. Minimum R -Value: 4.2 or reater as re uired 9 q by the applicable energy codes. 3. Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. o. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 175 degrees F. d. Minimum R -Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy codes. 4. Multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 10 Inches WG positive and 1.0 inches negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. d. Minimum R -Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy codes. 5. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. d. Minimum R -Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable anergy codes. 6. UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fiberglass insulation: aluminized vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 8 inches WG positive or negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 5000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 250 degrees F. d. Minimum R -Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy codes. E. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non -hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape. suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates. and recommended by manufacturer for pressure close of ducts. 2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tasted In accordance with ASTM E 84. 4. For flee With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled. 5. Ductwork Exposed to the Weather: Hard cast VersaGrip 102, (VG -102), UL 181 -AM compliant duct joint sealer, as manufactured by Carlisle, with fiberglass scrim tape reinforcement on all seams and Joints, lateral and longitudinal. F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36K steel; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate, support and seal in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as lndlcated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Construct T's, bends-, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectan ular elbows must be used rovide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining Ise Indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber Insulation. C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall bs minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. 2.03 DUCT MANUFACTURERS A. Metal -Fab, Inc.; SEMCO Incorporated; United McGill Corporation. 2.04 MANUFACTURED METAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Transverse Duct Connection System SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine drawings for the Architectural, Structural, Electrical and all other trades prior to preparation of ductwork shop drawings and prior to the fabrication of any ductwork. B. Resolve any conflicts encountered with the Engineer prior to fabrication. C. Identify on ductwork shop drawings any deviations in sizes or shapes mode necessary by the obstructions of other trades. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. C. Install and seal metol and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metol can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for Joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air f low. G. Use double Huta and lock washers on threaded rod supports. H. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. I. Support flexible duct runs every five feet In the horizontal direction to avoid dips and sags. J. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with one foot xi I n h f fl xi I not use fl xible ma mum e t a e b e duct Do e 9 duct to change direction. K. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strop or clamp. Longer duct lengths ars acceptable if depicted on the design drawings and allowed per local code. A maximum of one 90 degree bend, or equivalent, will be allowed in flexible duct runs. L. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust or clean with high power vacuum machines. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. 3.04 SCFEDUL.ES A. Ductwork Material: B. The Contractor may ope any of the following ductwork materials, at his -option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected piping material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. 1. Low Velocity Supply (Heating Systems): Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 2. Low Velocity Supply (System with Cooling Coils): Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 3. Return and Relief: Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 4. General Exhaust: Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 5. Outside Air Intake: Galvanized Steel. C. Ductwork Pressure Class: 1. Low Velocit Su I Heating S stems : Scheduled System ESP+0.25�. round up to next higher pressure class. 2. Low Velocity Supply (Systeme with Cooling): Scheduled System ESP +0.5", round up to next hi her ressure class. 3. Return and Relief: 1 inch. 4. General Exhaust: Scheduled System ESP +1.0", round up to next higher pressure class. END OF SECTION SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Volume control dampers. C. Flexible duct connections. D. Duct access doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Manufacturers: Krueger; Ruskin Company; Titus. B. Multi -blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2.02 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Louvers & Dampers. Inc.; Noilor Industries Inc.• Ruskin Co an • Prefco Inc. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. I t I r: F ri to of osed blade rn D. Mut � ads Damps ob ca app pane with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. E. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. F. The contractor shall provide either a mechanical or electrical cable operated system wherever dampers are located in non -accessible areas. 1. Mechanical cable operator system shall be similar and equal to Young Regulator Company, 'Bowden Cable Control" system including damper, flexible cable with casing and concealed ceiling regulator control. 2. Electrically operated damper control system shall be similar and equal to United Enertech Corporation, "Power Balance" system Including motor operated damper, RJ -11 plenum rated cabling and flush ceiling or wall mounted RJ -11 jack in remote plate. Include one hand held battery pack operator pack to be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the balancing. 2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NEPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide. 2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel. 2.04 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Acudor Products Inc.; Natlor Industries Inc.; Ruskin Company; SEMCO Incorporated. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Fabrication: Rigid and close -fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. D. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer'• instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNiA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic fir ra combination fire and smoke dampers, at a damps dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for i Provide 4 x 4 inch shoulder access and os ndicated. for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrlcatlon. C. Locate all dampers and control elements in accessible areas wherever possible to avoid access doors. Provide ceiling access doors for access to all dampers and control elements located above inaccessible ceiling areas. Provide minimum 12 x 12 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Provide balancing dampers at pointe on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take -off. E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. Do not locate dampers closer than 5 feet or 10 duct diameters from the air terminal device, whichever is greater. F. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. G. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment END OF SECTION SECTION 233423 - HWAC POM VENTILATM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cabinet and ceiling fans. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Greenheck; Loren Cook Company; PennBarry; Copt(veAtre. 2.02 POWER VENTILATORS - GENERAL A. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the ANCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bearing ANCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. D. UL CompI!once: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.03 CABINET AND CEILING FANS A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V -belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with acoustic Insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper In discharge. B. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor. C. Grille: Aluminum with baked white enamel finish or molded white plastic as speclfled on the Drawings. D. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated. aluminum blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked. E. Sheaves: Cost iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shofta and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected ao required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-positlon; fan shaft with self -aligning pre -lubricated ball bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide sheaves required for final air balance at no additional expense to the project. C. Secure roof and wall exhaueters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb or structure. D. Hung Cabinet Fans: 1. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. 2. Install flexible connections speclfled between fan and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. E. Provide gravity backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling fans and as indicated. END OF SECTION SECTION 233T00 - AIR OUTLETS NO INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rectangular ceiling diffusers. B. Grid core exhaust and return grilles. C. Wall registers and grilles. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, accessories, and noise level. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet erformance in P accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Test and rate louver performance fn accordance with ANCA 500-L. C. Code requirements shall supersede any conflicting re ulrements of this Sectlan. q 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Man fo r r lifi ions: n s eci li in in u ctu a Qua cat Comps y p a z g manufacturing the type of products specified in this Section, with minimum flue years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Titus; Krueger; Price Industries; Carnes Company HVAC; Hart & Cooley; Ruskin. 2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. T e: uare ad ustable attern sta ed multi -core YP � J P mP or architectural plaque diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectoriztng baffles where lndlcated. B. Frame: Inverted T -bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. (To allow lift -out removal of the diffuser without removal of the plaster frame.) C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish. D. Accessories: Opposed blade damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser f ace . 2.03 GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES A. Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1 Inch louvers. B. Fabrication: Aluminum with factory off-white enamel finish. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. D. Frame: Channel lay -in frame for suspended grid ceilings where face size exceeds 18 x 18 inch. E. Damper (if specified on drawings): Integral, gang -operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.04 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined and Individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face, double deflection. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel flniah. D. Damper: Integral, gong -operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. E. Rough Service: Provide front pivoted or welded in place blades, securely fastened to be immobile. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer"s instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments In position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as port of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. END OF SECTION e4ie ® Nswl * ■ Orttshe ■ I = Angels ■ 800-581-0963 wwwxbrticlaeIIAM LAWREN GROUP - Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.D818 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: \kAJ R,OY $(�+ //� .N oZ ', jE jy -hN �, � I tiff % No PE E � � +O 'STATE OF 44 �e, R �'�� i CO 10p'..•' .''i R..".� t�G` I /114NAt%1% � 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: N m Z O a V W ' i. o U W O oc Q 0) W u This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheat TMo HVAC SPECIFICATIONS Project Number: Sheet Number: 11256.C18 Drawn By: JRE Issue Date: September 20, 2011 1. AABC MN -1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. ASF#2AE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Venttlatton, A1r�ondltlontng, and Refrlgeratton Systems. 3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 4. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the Project. C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with Ilfe safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and Inspection procedures with the authorities having Jurisdlctton. D. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this Section with a minimum of five years experience. 2. Certified by one of the following: a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau. c. TABS, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute. 3. The TAB Agency must be a completely independent, third party balancing contractor with no financial, common owners or other ties to the installing contractors. E. TAB Supervisor and Techntctan QualI 1 cat Ions: Certified by same organization as TAB agency. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Air Outlets and Inlets; Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 15 percent of design. 3.03 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Permanent) mark settin s of valy s r and other y g e , damps s, adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. B. Mark on the Drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the final report. 3.04 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systema to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectfonol area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. Do not use diffuser, grille or register integral dampers for balancing adjustments unless the plans do not indicate duct mounted devices. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of tan s eeds. Provide drive than es re uired at no additional expense to the Owner. Varygbranch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. H. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions in all operating modes as indicated in the sequence of control. I. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. J. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions and at all intermediate operating conditions specified in the sequence of control. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. 3.05 SCOPE A. Equipment Requiring Testin Adjusting, and Balancing (if present on the project: 1. HVAC Pumps; Boilers; All Air Handling Equipment; All Packaged Heating and/or Cooling Equipment; All Coil; All Heat Exchangers; Terminal Heat Transfer Units; Air Terminal Units; Air Inlets and Outlets 3.06 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED A. Report (os applicable to the project): 1. Summary Comments: o. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization d. Nomenclature used throughout report and test condltlons. B. Electric Motors and drives: 1. Manufacturer; Model/Frame; HP/BHP; Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load; RPM; Service factor; Sheave Make/Size/Bore. 2. V -Belt Drives: Identification/location; Required driven RPM; Driven sheave, diameter and RPM; Belt, size and quantity; C. Coolin and Heatin Coils: 9 9 1. Identification/number; Manufacturer 2. Air flow, design and actual 3. Air pressure drop, design and actual 4. Entering and leaving air DB and WB temperature, design and actual 5. Water flow, design and actual (if applicable) 6. Water pressure drop, design and actual (if applicable) 7. Enterin and leavingg water temperature, design and gif actual a licable PP D. Air Moving Equipment: 1. Manufacturer; Model number; Serial number; Arrangement/Class/Discharge 2. Air flow, specified and actual 3. Inlet• Dischar e• Total static ressure total 9 P ( external), speclfled and actual E. Air Distribution Tests: 1. Air terminal number 2. Room number/location 3. Terminal type 4. Terminal size 5. Area factor 6. Design velocity 7. Design air flow 8. Test Sfinal velocity 9. Teat (final air flow 10. Percent of design air flow END OF SECTION SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 (NERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct inaulotion. B. Duct liner. C. Supply, return or exhaust ducts in ceiling spaces. 1.02 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after lnstallatlon for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NEPA 255, or UL 723. B. Manufacturer: Knouf Fiber Gloss; Johns Manville Corporation; Owens Corning Corp.; CertainTeed Corporation. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value: 0.31 at 75 degNs a F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Po a m (0.02 perm inch), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. C. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kroft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. D. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. 2.03 DUCT LINER A. Insulation: Incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071; flexible blanket, rigid board, and preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with acrylic polymer shown to be fungus and bacteria resistant by testing to ASTM G 21. 1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F. 2. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F. 3. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Slde for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum. 4. Minimum Noise Reduction CoeffIc1onto: a. 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.30. b. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45. c. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.60. d. 2 inch Thickness: 0.70. B. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardont type. C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad or impact applied with integral, or press -on head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install In accordance with manufacturer's Instructions and NAIMA National Insulation Standards. B. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. C. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier acket. 2. nsulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. D. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure inaulotion without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Llit duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping. E. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metol and Flexible for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse oints. 4.al liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 3.02 SCI-EEDULES A. The Contractor may use any of the following insulating materials, at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and utility company requirements. Verlflcatlon of compliance of the selected Insulating material and thickness with all State and local codes and utility company requirements is the sole responslbllity of the installing Contractor. B. Supply air ducts in ceiling spaces: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 2 inches thick. 2. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation: 1-1/2 inches thick. END OF SECTION SECTION 233100 - NVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Nonmetal ductwork. C. Duct cleaning. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Nb variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permieaion. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts, only after approval of the Engineer. B. Report all conflicts with structure or other obstructions, prior to fabrication of any ductwork. Suitable adjustments in the sizes of ducts shall be accommodated without any additional expense to the Owner. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, porticulare such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work for all systema. No ductwork shall be fabricated until engineer approved shop drawings have been received by the Contractor. Identify on ductwork shop drawings any devlattons In sizes or shapes made necessary by the obstructions of other trades. B. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK] - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NEPA 90A, NEPA 906, and NEPA 96 standards. B. Code or utility company requirements shall supersede any conflictin re uirements of this Section. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONSg q A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized S I cts: Hot -di ed alvanized steel tee Du sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS TypepB, with G90/Z275 coating. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS, cold -rolled commercial steel. C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T651 or of equivalent strength. D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: 1. The Contractor may use any of the following ductwork materials, at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected ductwork material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. 2. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F. d. Minimum R -Value: 4.2 or reater as re uired 9 q by the applicable energy codes. 3. Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. o. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 175 degrees F. d. Minimum R -Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy codes. 4. Multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 10 Inches WG positive and 1.0 inches negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. d. Minimum R -Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy codes. 5. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. d. Minimum R -Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable anergy codes. 6. UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fiberglass insulation: aluminized vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 8 inches WG positive or negative. b. Maximum Velocity: 5000 fpm. c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 250 degrees F. d. Minimum R -Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy codes. E. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non -hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape. suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates. and recommended by manufacturer for pressure close of ducts. 2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tasted In accordance with ASTM E 84. 4. For flee With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled. 5. Ductwork Exposed to the Weather: Hard cast VersaGrip 102, (VG -102), UL 181 -AM compliant duct joint sealer, as manufactured by Carlisle, with fiberglass scrim tape reinforcement on all seams and Joints, lateral and longitudinal. F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36K steel; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. 2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate, support and seal in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as lndlcated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Construct T's, bends-, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectan ular elbows must be used rovide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining Ise Indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber Insulation. C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall bs minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. 2.03 DUCT MANUFACTURERS A. Metal -Fab, Inc.; SEMCO Incorporated; United McGill Corporation. 2.04 MANUFACTURED METAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Transverse Duct Connection System SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine drawings for the Architectural, Structural, Electrical and all other trades prior to preparation of ductwork shop drawings and prior to the fabrication of any ductwork. B. Resolve any conflicts encountered with the Engineer prior to fabrication. C. Identify on ductwork shop drawings any deviations in sizes or shapes mode necessary by the obstructions of other trades. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. C. Install and seal metol and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metol can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for Joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air f low. G. Use double Huta and lock washers on threaded rod supports. H. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. I. Support flexible duct runs every five feet In the horizontal direction to avoid dips and sags. J. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with one foot xi I n h f fl xi I not use fl xible ma mum e t a e b e duct Do e 9 duct to change direction. K. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strop or clamp. Longer duct lengths ars acceptable if depicted on the design drawings and allowed per local code. A maximum of one 90 degree bend, or equivalent, will be allowed in flexible duct runs. L. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust or clean with high power vacuum machines. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. 3.04 SCFEDUL.ES A. Ductwork Material: B. The Contractor may ope any of the following ductwork materials, at his -option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected piping material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. 1. Low Velocity Supply (Heating Systems): Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 2. Low Velocity Supply (System with Cooling Coils): Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 3. Return and Relief: Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 4. General Exhaust: Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 5. Outside Air Intake: Galvanized Steel. C. Ductwork Pressure Class: 1. Low Velocit Su I Heating S stems : Scheduled System ESP+0.25�. round up to next higher pressure class. 2. Low Velocity Supply (Systeme with Cooling): Scheduled System ESP +0.5", round up to next hi her ressure class. 3. Return and Relief: 1 inch. 4. General Exhaust: Scheduled System ESP +1.0", round up to next higher pressure class. END OF SECTION SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Volume control dampers. C. Flexible duct connections. D. Duct access doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Manufacturers: Krueger; Ruskin Company; Titus. B. Multi -blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2.02 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Louvers & Dampers. Inc.; Noilor Industries Inc.• Ruskin Co an • Prefco Inc. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. I t I r: F ri to of osed blade rn D. Mut � ads Damps ob ca app pane with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. E. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. F. The contractor shall provide either a mechanical or electrical cable operated system wherever dampers are located in non -accessible areas. 1. Mechanical cable operator system shall be similar and equal to Young Regulator Company, 'Bowden Cable Control" system including damper, flexible cable with casing and concealed ceiling regulator control. 2. Electrically operated damper control system shall be similar and equal to United Enertech Corporation, "Power Balance" system Including motor operated damper, RJ -11 plenum rated cabling and flush ceiling or wall mounted RJ -11 jack in remote plate. Include one hand held battery pack operator pack to be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the balancing. 2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NEPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide. 2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel. 2.04 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Acudor Products Inc.; Natlor Industries Inc.; Ruskin Company; SEMCO Incorporated. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Fabrication: Rigid and close -fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. D. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer'• instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNiA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic fir ra combination fire and smoke dampers, at a damps dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for i Provide 4 x 4 inch shoulder access and os ndicated. for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrlcatlon. C. Locate all dampers and control elements in accessible areas wherever possible to avoid access doors. Provide ceiling access doors for access to all dampers and control elements located above inaccessible ceiling areas. Provide minimum 12 x 12 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Provide balancing dampers at pointe on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take -off. E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. Do not locate dampers closer than 5 feet or 10 duct diameters from the air terminal device, whichever is greater. F. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. G. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment END OF SECTION SECTION 233423 - HWAC POM VENTILATM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cabinet and ceiling fans. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Greenheck; Loren Cook Company; PennBarry; Copt(veAtre. 2.02 POWER VENTILATORS - GENERAL A. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the ANCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bearing ANCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. D. UL CompI!once: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.03 CABINET AND CEILING FANS A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V -belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with acoustic Insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper In discharge. B. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor. C. Grille: Aluminum with baked white enamel finish or molded white plastic as speclfled on the Drawings. D. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated. aluminum blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked. E. Sheaves: Cost iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shofta and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected ao required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-positlon; fan shaft with self -aligning pre -lubricated ball bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide sheaves required for final air balance at no additional expense to the project. C. Secure roof and wall exhaueters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb or structure. D. Hung Cabinet Fans: 1. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. 2. Install flexible connections speclfled between fan and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. E. Provide gravity backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling fans and as indicated. END OF SECTION SECTION 233T00 - AIR OUTLETS NO INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rectangular ceiling diffusers. B. Grid core exhaust and return grilles. C. Wall registers and grilles. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, accessories, and noise level. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet erformance in P accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Test and rate louver performance fn accordance with ANCA 500-L. C. Code requirements shall supersede any conflicting re ulrements of this Sectlan. q 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Man fo r r lifi ions: n s eci li in in u ctu a Qua cat Comps y p a z g manufacturing the type of products specified in this Section, with minimum flue years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Titus; Krueger; Price Industries; Carnes Company HVAC; Hart & Cooley; Ruskin. 2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. T e: uare ad ustable attern sta ed multi -core YP � J P mP or architectural plaque diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectoriztng baffles where lndlcated. B. Frame: Inverted T -bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. (To allow lift -out removal of the diffuser without removal of the plaster frame.) C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish. D. Accessories: Opposed blade damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser f ace . 2.03 GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES A. Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1 Inch louvers. B. Fabrication: Aluminum with factory off-white enamel finish. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. D. Frame: Channel lay -in frame for suspended grid ceilings where face size exceeds 18 x 18 inch. E. Damper (if specified on drawings): Integral, gang -operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.04 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined and Individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face, double deflection. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel flniah. D. Damper: Integral, gong -operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. E. Rough Service: Provide front pivoted or welded in place blades, securely fastened to be immobile. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer"s instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments In position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as port of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. END OF SECTION e4ie ® Nswl * ■ Orttshe ■ I = Angels ■ 800-581-0963 wwwxbrticlaeIIAM LAWREN GROUP - Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.D818 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: \kAJ R,OY $(�+ //� .N oZ ', jE jy -hN �, � I tiff % No PE E � � +O 'STATE OF 44 �e, R �'�� i CO 10p'..•' .''i R..".� t�G` I /114NAt%1% � 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: N m Z O a V W ' i. o U W O oc Q 0) W u This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheat TMo HVAC SPECIFICATIONS Project Number: Sheet Number: 11256.C18 Drawn By: JRE Issue Date: September 20, 2011 ii 7-7 -777 7-J 3'-10" 1 SCALE: 1/4' = 1'-0" LEGEND EXIS17NG NEW WORK ® NEW TO EXISTi CONNEC77ON LIGHTING NOTES I LIGHTING SWITCHPLATE ELEVATION I OMER& L16WTIAG MOTES A . ANY EXISTING CONDI TIONS INDICATED ARE BASED ON INFORMA TION PROVIDED BY OTHERS AND POSSIBLE L IMI TED FIELD VERIFICATION. TIE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST FOR ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS A T NO ADDI TIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE PROJECT SITE, REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIONS AGAINST THE PLANS, AND FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE WORK PRIOR TO BIDDING AND START OF THE WORK. C. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DEMOL I TION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AND LUMINAIRES AS INDICATED AND/OR AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE NEW WORK. REMOVE ALL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, COADUI TS, SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ETC. THAT ARE NOT SHOWN AND ARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO COMPLETE TAE NEW WORK. D. RECESSED BOXES AND CONDUITS CONCEALED WITHIN WALLS OR FLOORS THAT ARE TO REMAIN ARE PERMITTED TO BE ABANDONED IN PLACE OAL Y IF THE OPENINGS ARE PA TCHED AND 7NE CONDUCTORS ARE REMOVED. E. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE FIRST SAL VAGE RIGHT ON ALL DEMOL ISHED EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, AND MATERIALS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLISHED EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, AND MATERIALS THE OWNER REJECTS. F. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF EXISTING CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AND LUMINAIRES THAT ARE NOT BEIM' REMOVED. G. ALL WIRING DEVICES AND THEIR ASSOCIA TED FACE PLA TES SHALL BE WHITE. H. SEE PANEL SCHEDULES FOR INFORMA TION ON CIRCUITS THAT ARE TO BE ROUTED THROUGH CONTACTORS OR RELAYS FOR CON7ROL . L16KIAG A>b7ES 1. ALL WIRING FOR EMERGENCY, EXIT AND NIGHT LUMINAIRES SHALL BE AHEAD OF ANY LIGHTING CONTROL. 2. PROVIDE LIGHTING CONTROL SWI TCYRANK. SEE DETAIL 2/El FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. LOWERCASE LETTERS ADJACENT TO LUMINAIRES ON PLANS CORRESPOND TO THE ASSOCIATED SWITCH ON THE SWI TCHBANK DETAIL. CONFIRM SWI TCHBAAK WILL FI T WI THIN THIS DESIGNA TED AREA AN9 STACK MUL TIPLE SWI TCHBAIWCS A T THIS LOCA TION IF A SINGLE SWI TCHBANK WILL NOT FIT WITHIN THIS DESIGNA TED AREA. J. PROVIDE LEVI TON #8080OW INCANDESCENT DIMMER SWITCH. 4. CONNECT RECEPTACLE TO SWITCHED LIGHTING CIRCUIT AS INDICA TED. 5. CONNECT L IGHTING CIRCUI T VIA SWI TCH(ES) LOCA TED WI THIN ROOM AS SHOWN OR IN LIGHTING CONTROL SWI TCHBANK. LOWERCASE LETTERS ADJACENT TO LUMINAIRES INDICA TE CORRESPONDING CONT90L SWI TCH WI THIN L IGHTING SWI TCHBANK. 6. CONNECT TO EXHAUST FAN SERVING THIS ROOM. SEE SHEET E2 FOR LOCA TION OF EXHAUST FAN. 7. CONNECT TO EXHAUST FAN SERVING THIS ROOM. SHEET E-101 FOR LOCA TION OF EXHAUST FAN. L IGHTS AND EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE SWI TCHED IADEPEA17Z Y. A-4 A-4 A-6 A-6 A-33 A-35 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) u ® e 0 e e 6 A R DISPENSE/DISPLAY _.114 WAITING AREA WAITING AREA Di 27 TRACK LIGHTING D 2 D LIGHTING (f) C(e) C(f) C(e) C(f) C(e) (f) C(e) C f J 6 A 2 A 2 A 29 x +92" C-6' C(e) C-8' (e) 27 D 4 4 6 HC(f) A b A a t(f) A EM 6 b I1:i 27 A NOTE 3 T 6 „ L 0 1 C(f) L'il" t.,�t r 101 (e) 21 7 D 3 D C-4 EM 6 MGR 2 C(e) NM A t 1w1 Ir�� I A AE 29 4 AE 4 A K (e) ILL. 27 D 27 —2,4,6, (NOTE 5) 6 EXIS77W PANEL A " ,. �a,a.�g,J 6 A B A A 6 a Lie (f) 4 D1 A-27 3 29 J EM NL q A-29 4 4 6 A A 6 AE A A b a 6 6 c d oe A-33, 35, (NO1F 5) NOTE 2 00000 X" 4 V4 J C-6' C e� op - 29 29 D1 25 6 EM NL A c E EM NL A 29 4 4 C f) 6 6 A AE +10 A AE 1Ub C-4 C f 102 d E 25 +10 25 A 29 C e) D1 NM NL M 4 4 6 6 P__� A a 6 6 AE A c A d 6 EM NL X NOTE 1 (7' PICAL) A-2, x 6 +92 AE RECEPTION/ Ju M PASSAGE 105 PRE -CON F1 104 _ 4 A 4 A 4 A 2 A 2 A 2 A M M IILS i iiCbiv , WOO REILa? R N'S OM ab ei? ?I wPPI .Y 107 2 2 2 2 2 B B A NOTE 6 NOTE 6 E +108 4 +10 E 4 E 4 E 10 " +108"D1 4 S PPL_Y 4 D1 D1 4 NOTE 7 4 tk NOTE 4 ?N0/ 5) I I NOR H T� LIGHTING PLAN 1 SCALE: 1/4' = 1'-0" LEGEND EXIS17NG NEW WORK ® NEW TO EXISTi CONNEC77ON LIGHTING NOTES I LIGHTING SWITCHPLATE ELEVATION I OMER& L16WTIAG MOTES A . ANY EXISTING CONDI TIONS INDICATED ARE BASED ON INFORMA TION PROVIDED BY OTHERS AND POSSIBLE L IMI TED FIELD VERIFICATION. TIE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST FOR ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS A T NO ADDI TIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE PROJECT SITE, REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIONS AGAINST THE PLANS, AND FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE WORK PRIOR TO BIDDING AND START OF THE WORK. C. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DEMOL I TION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AND LUMINAIRES AS INDICATED AND/OR AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE NEW WORK. REMOVE ALL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, COADUI TS, SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ETC. THAT ARE NOT SHOWN AND ARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO COMPLETE TAE NEW WORK. D. RECESSED BOXES AND CONDUITS CONCEALED WITHIN WALLS OR FLOORS THAT ARE TO REMAIN ARE PERMITTED TO BE ABANDONED IN PLACE OAL Y IF THE OPENINGS ARE PA TCHED AND 7NE CONDUCTORS ARE REMOVED. E. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE FIRST SAL VAGE RIGHT ON ALL DEMOL ISHED EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, AND MATERIALS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLISHED EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, AND MATERIALS THE OWNER REJECTS. F. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF EXISTING CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AND LUMINAIRES THAT ARE NOT BEIM' REMOVED. G. ALL WIRING DEVICES AND THEIR ASSOCIA TED FACE PLA TES SHALL BE WHITE. H. SEE PANEL SCHEDULES FOR INFORMA TION ON CIRCUITS THAT ARE TO BE ROUTED THROUGH CONTACTORS OR RELAYS FOR CON7ROL . L16KIAG A>b7ES 1. ALL WIRING FOR EMERGENCY, EXIT AND NIGHT LUMINAIRES SHALL BE AHEAD OF ANY LIGHTING CONTROL. 2. PROVIDE LIGHTING CONTROL SWI TCYRANK. SEE DETAIL 2/El FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. LOWERCASE LETTERS ADJACENT TO LUMINAIRES ON PLANS CORRESPOND TO THE ASSOCIATED SWITCH ON THE SWI TCHBANK DETAIL. CONFIRM SWI TCHBAAK WILL FI T WI THIN THIS DESIGNA TED AREA AN9 STACK MUL TIPLE SWI TCHBAIWCS A T THIS LOCA TION IF A SINGLE SWI TCHBANK WILL NOT FIT WITHIN THIS DESIGNA TED AREA. J. PROVIDE LEVI TON #8080OW INCANDESCENT DIMMER SWITCH. 4. CONNECT RECEPTACLE TO SWITCHED LIGHTING CIRCUIT AS INDICA TED. 5. CONNECT L IGHTING CIRCUI T VIA SWI TCH(ES) LOCA TED WI THIN ROOM AS SHOWN OR IN LIGHTING CONTROL SWI TCHBANK. LOWERCASE LETTERS ADJACENT TO LUMINAIRES INDICA TE CORRESPONDING CONT90L SWI TCH WI THIN L IGHTING SWI TCHBANK. 6. CONNECT TO EXHAUST FAN SERVING THIS ROOM. SEE SHEET E2 FOR LOCA TION OF EXHAUST FAN. 7. CONNECT TO EXHAUST FAN SERVING THIS ROOM. SHEET E-101 FOR LOCA TION OF EXHAUST FAN. L IGHTS AND EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE SWI TCHED IADEPEA17Z Y. A-4 A-4 A-6 A-6 A-33 A-35 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) ® e 0 e e DISPENSE/DISPLAY DISPENSE/DISPLAY WAITING AREA WAITING AREA TRACK TRACK LIGHTING LIGHTING LIGHTING LIGHTING LIGHTING LIGHTING SWITCHPLATE ELEVATION SCALE: NOT TO SCALE khna&el enginwis. ■ NewYorh ■ Omdo ■ Lw A rvida ■ NO -581-0963 www.schttedad.aom LAW GRORENUP Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0016 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax:402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional S2gj \ �� ��G E NSA ••..qC%��.• c4 NoP 2 . ORI'D :•'SP�� 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: T M cz 70 .O LL 70 L O -E-J ca Cn cn C: C/) U _C,0 io Z C/) CD O - LU c (L CIO rr (M) OZ5 CD �> ■ eeee� _ W L -F�+ t� m 0CIO � U �m 0 O �CzLO (L < (.)2 N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: LIGHTING PLAN Project Number: Sheet Number: 11256.C18 Drawn By: NILE Issue Date: E I September 20, 2011 NOTE- 13 3,-0" I� -- --- ..._ --_._ _ _ _ _ p NN _ __..___ ` LAWREN I I 14; 14 +9" }� 16 FCL 1 t3 �w N +9 +9 lll���JJ! ► m I I GROUP C 14 NOTE ELECTRICAL NOTES -8,10,12 /—NOTE 5 f� 1 OA NOTE 7- N, 'ION/ s NS V07F 9 ' DISPF C � .. 1 IG C '! IG N07F 9 ' SEE SHEET El FOR EXACT LOCA 77ON AND CIRCU177NG J REOUIREMEN75 --------_,� __---._.___ N07F 4 5 P011I AW SYSTEW AWES A . ANY EXISTING CONDI TIONS INDICA TED ARE BASED ON INFORMA TION PROVIDED BY OTI-ERS AND POSSIBLE L IMI TED FIELD VERIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST FOR ACTUAL FIELD CONDI TIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. S. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE PROJECT SITE, REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIONS AGAINST RE PLANS, AND FAMILIARIZE HIMSELf WITH THE WORK PRIOR TO BIDDING AND START OF THE WORK. C. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DEMOL I TION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AND LUMINAIRES AS INDICATED Alm/OR AS RSOUIRED TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE NEW WORK. REMOVE ALL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, CONDUITS, SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ETC. THAT ARE NOT SHOWN AND ARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO COMPLETE THE NEW WORK. D. RECESSED BOXES AND CONDUITS CONCEALED WITHIN WALLS OR FLOORS THAT ARE TO REMAIN ARE PERMI TTED TO BE ABANDONED IN PLACE ONL Y IF THE OPENINGS ARE PA TCHED AND THE CONDUCTORS ARE REMOVED. E. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE FIRST SAL VALE RIGHT ON ALL DEMOLISHED EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, AND MATERIALS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLISHED EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, AND MA TERIALS THE OWNER REJECTS. F. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF EXISTING CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AND LUMINAIRES THAT ARE NOT BEING REMOVED. G. ALL WIRING DEVICES AND THEIR ASSOCIATED FACE PLATES SHALL BE WHITE. H. SEE PALL SCHEDULES FOR INFORMA TION ON CIRCUITS THA T ARE TO BE ROUTED THROUGH CONTACTORS OR RELA YS FOR CONTROL . NOTE 7 A -1,3,5,(j POWER AND SYSTEMS PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = V-0" (HOLD) POMER AAD SYSIEW AMES 1. PROVIDE A J'-8 " x 8 '-0 " x 1/2 " PL YWOOD TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. PROVIDE GROUND BAR MOUNTED ON BACKBOARD WITH EQUIPMENT GROUNDING COADUCTOR CONVECTED TO POWER SYSTEM'S GROUA19INC ELECTRODE SYSTEM. VERIFY EXACT LOCA TION OF TELEPHONE BACKBOARD WI TH THE OWNER PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. 2. PROVIDE A QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED A T +84 " A. F. F. FOR CONNECTION OF TELEPHONE AIV SECURITY EQUIPMENT. J. APPROXIMA TE LOCA TIONS OF L IGHTING CONTROLS. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF THE LIGHTING CONTROLS WITH Tim OWNER PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. SEE LIGHTING CONTROLS SCHEDULES AND DETAIL ON SLEET E4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 4. EXTEND DA TA/TELEPHONE CONDUI T FROM WALL A T 2" A. F. F. EXTIN9 DA TA/TELEPHONE CABLE THROUGH CASEWORK TO PRINTER LOCA TION. VERIFY LOCATIONS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS. 5. SHOW WINDOW RECEPTACLES SHALL BE CEILING MOUNTED. COORDINATE THE EXACT L OCA TION WI TH THE ARCHI TECTU UAL PLANS PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. 6. PROVIDE FINAL CONVECTION TO SIGNAGE. COORDINATE LOCATION AAD ALL REQUIREMENTS WITH SIGN CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH—IN. PROVIDE AN APPROPRIATE LOCAL DISCONVECTING AEANS MOUNTED IN AN ACCESSIBLE, INCONSPICUOUS LOCA TION THA T IS WI THIN SIGHT OF THE SIGN. EACH SIGIV CIRCUIT SHALL HAVE A SEPARA TE NEUTRAL AND SEPARATE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. 7. ROUTE I" CONDUIT UNDER SLAB FOR STLE—UP IN DESKS. VERIFY APPROVED METHOD OF SLAB PENETRA TION (CORE DRILL ING, SAW CUTTING, ETC. ) WI TH TfE LANDLORD PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PATCHING THE FLOOR AFTER THE WORK IS COMPLETE. ROUTE ALL CONDUITS IN A COMMON TRENCH. 8. RUN 1 " FLEXIBLE CONDUI T TO DATA AND PHOAE DEVICES UNDER THE COUNTER. VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS WITH THE ARCHI TECTU UAL PLANS PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. EXTEND CONDUI T A T WALL TO ACCESSIBLE CEIL ING SPACE. 9. RUN FLEXIBLE CONDUIT TO SURFACE MOU'VTED RECEPTACLES UNDER TEE COUNTER. VERIFY EXACT L OCA TIONS WITH THE ARCHI7ECTWAL PLANS PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. 10. PROVIDE A JUNCTION BOX WITH A TOGGLE SWITCH FOR RECIRCULATION PUMP P-1. VERIFY EXACT ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS AND LOCATION WI TH THE FLU MBING CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. 11. DISCONVECT SWITCH IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. MAINTAIN EXISTING CIRCUITING AND CONTROLS FOR EXISTING ROOFTOP UNITS. NOTE 3 -14,16,18 C �► EXIS77NG PANEL A" 12. CONNECT TO LIGHTING CIRCUIT SERVING THIS ROOM. LIGHTING AND EXHAUST FAN SHALL BE SWI TCHED INDEPEAIDENTL Y. SEE Sh EET El. FOR CONTINUA TION TO SWITCHED LIGHTING CIRCUIT. 13. THIS AREA IS CONSIDERED A PATIENT CARE AREA AND SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS SET FORTH BY NEC SECTION 517. PROVIDE THE REDUNDANT EQUIPMENT GROUNDING PATH AS REJUIRED BY NEC SECTION 517. 1J AND THE ELECTRICAL SPECIFICA TIONS. 14. CONNECT TO SWITCHED LIGHTING CIRCUIT SERVING THIS ROOM. SEE SHEET El FOR CONTINUA TION TO SWI TCHED L IGHTING CIRCUI T. a rq +42" GFCI v`w )IVEN'S HLS 1 ROOM 106 EF -1 TF 2 7E- 1 -19,21,23 LEGEND EXISTING NEW WORK ® NEW TO EXIS17NG CONNECTION §&:hna&el e4nims• ■ NewYok ■ onmM ■ U sAngdo ■ 800-581-M www.sdmedadj=n Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0916 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: QY $C T�ir ,,�-~-~........ _� C9 No P 0 88AA 2%% 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: r N M Cd 70 L- 0 LL L c O Co U) CD U) U _C 0)(1) 0 Z U) > fj ) O - LlJ0 oCP= CZ E -0 U �> W L �� 5 CD cz Q com v C� W � a� o O �� (') �N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: POWER AND SYSTEMS PLAN Project Number: Sheet Number: 11256.018 Drawn By: NLE Issue Date: E2 September 20, 2011 PANELBOARD SCHEDULES I LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE EXISTING PANEL "A'' SCHEDULE FED FROM: LANDLORD SERVICE GUTTER VOLTAGE: 120/208V, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE BUS MATERIAL: EXISTING BUS LOAD: 238 AMPS BUS RATING: 400 AMPS MAIN: MAIN LUG ONLY NOTES CKT. LOAD DESCRIPTION A 1 RM. 109 COMPUTER/POS 1440 3 RM. 109 RECEPT. 5 RM. 109 RECEPT. 7 RM. 109 RECEPT. 1260 9 RM. 109 TV/DVD RECEP 11 RM. 109 RECEPT. 13 RM. 119 COMPUTER/POS 1000 15 RM. 119 RECEPT. 17 RM. 119 RECEPT. 19 RM. 108 RECEPT. 540 21 RM. 108 EWC 23 RM. 108 REFRIGERATOR 25 LIGHTING CONTROL 200 27 CONSULT LTG 29 SUPPLY/BREAK RM LTG 31 RM. 119 RECEPT. 900 33 TRACK LTG 35 TRACK LTG 37 HWH-1 1500 39 ------ C-2 41 PUMP P-1 TOTALS: 6840 •�� SII '�V 100 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 70/3 20/1 --- 20/1 040 20/1 1V//i MEN,1 :.I '///% Ir" :II 1%//% III FAM�p I y/. iS//%/. I%//i I . 1® MMES/Z� BREAKER BREAKER 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 70/3 20/1 --- 20/1 _ --- 20/1 70/3 20/1 — — — 20/1 --- 20/2 70/3 III E/��6//i 15/1 — — — MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED ENCLOSURE: NEMA 1 FAULT CURRENT: 24068 AMPS AIC RATING: 42 kAIC OPTIONS*: INSULATED/ISOLATED GROUND BAR NOTES: * SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR OTHER OPTIONS REQUIRED BUT NOT NECESSARILY NOTED HERE C-1 CIRCUIT SHALL BE ROUTED THROUGH CONTACTOR #1. C-2 CIRCUIT SHALL BE ROUTED THROUGH CONTACTOR #2. LOAD DESCRIPTION CKT. NOTES GENERAL LTG 2 DEMAND FACTOR PRECON/SUPPLY/RR LTG 4 PHASE OFFICE/SUPPLY/WAIT L 6 TOTAL RM. 101 COMPUTER/POS •�� �,/,i//ill RM. 101 RECEPT. 10 1071 RM. 101 SIGN 12 C-1 RM. 112 RECEPT. .I %//%%//i RM. 112 COMPUTER/POS 00 III i//i /�%/% 3780 . I III 3338 RM. 119 MICROWAVE 22 Ei,/i RM. 119 TELEPHONE BO 24 4300 EXISTING RTU -1 III E/��6//i ------ MMA,IIone 7950 //i MMES/Z� 200 III III E//EMi//i ------ IMEN WITII %//i VEMEE/Z� 100% III III �MINE1101 ------ 00/,, III MIM0 1 �%%/% COOLING ONLY: v II 0511 I1: ff • NOTES: * SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR OTHER OPTIONS REQUIRED BUT NOT NECESSARILY NOTED HERE C-1 CIRCUIT SHALL BE ROUTED THROUGH CONTACTOR #1. C-2 CIRCUIT SHALL BE ROUTED THROUGH CONTACTOR #2. LOAD DESCRIPTION CKT. NOTES GENERAL LTG 2 DEMAND FACTOR PRECON/SUPPLY/RR LTG 4 PHASE OFFICE/SUPPLY/WAIT L 6 TOTAL RM. 101 COMPUTER/POS 8 DEMAND RM. 101 RECEPT. 10 1071 RM. 101 SIGN 12 C-1 RM. 112 RECEPT. 14 9769 RM. 112 COMPUTER/POS 16 90% RM. 112 RECEPT. 18 3780 RM. 119 COUNTER RECE 20 3338 RM. 119 MICROWAVE 22 OTHER CONTINUOUS: RM. 119 TELEPHONE BO 24 4300 EXISTING RTU -1 26 1560 ------ 28 7950 ------ 30 200 EXISTING RTU -2 32 1700 ------ 34 2730 ------ 36 100% EXISTING RTU -3 38 1500 ------ 40 0 ------ 42 COOLING ONLY: N.E.C. LOAD ANALYSIS FOR EXISTING PANEL "A" (INCLUDING SUBFEEDS) CATALOG NUMBER LOAD DESCRIPTION DEMAND FACTOR PHASE A (VA) PHASE B (VA) PHASE C (VA) TOTAL (VA) CONNECT. DEMAND CONNECT. DEMAND CONNECT. DEMAND CONNECT. DEMAND LIGHTING: 125% 1071 1339 4516 5645 4182 5228 9769 12212 RECEPTACLE: 90% 4960 4474 3780 3410 3700 3338 12440 11220 OTHER CONTINUOUS: 125% 3440 4300 1360 1700 1560 1950 6360 7950 OTHER NONCONTINUOUS: 100% 200 200 1700 1700 830 830 2730 2730 WATER HEATING: 100% 1500 1500 1500 1500 0 0 3000 3000 COOLING ONLY: 100% 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000 15000 45000 45000 MOTOR: 100% 0 0 0 0 304 304 304 304 54'-0" TRACK LTG. AT 150 VA/2 FT- 125% 1350 1688 1350 1688 1350 1688 4050 5063 LPCO2W TOTAL: 27521 28500 29206 30642 26926 28337 83653 87478 EQUIVALENT AMPS: 230 238 244 256 225 237 1 233 243 PHASE BALANCE: —2% —3% 5% 6% —4% —3% 4' TRACK FOR TYPE C FIXTURES LEGEND EX/S71NG NEW WORK ® NEW TO EX1577NG CONNECT/ON LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE MARK MANUFACTURER CATALOG NUMBER LAMP SPECIFICATION (SEE GENERAL NOTE A) VOLTS MOUNTING 7U91 W U N �' Z_ U C -)REMARKS LAMP QUAN LAMP DESCRIPTION LAMP TYPE A DAY–BRITS 2P3GS332-36FL-120-1/3–EB 3 F32T8/835 FL 120 X X AE DAY–BRITS 2P3GS332-36FL-120-1/3–EB–E5 3 F32T8/835 FL 120 X X B DAY–BRITS 2P3GS317-33FL-120-1/3–EB 3 F1 7T8/835 FL 120 X X BE DAY–BRITE 2P3GS317-33FL-120-1/3–EB–E5 3 F1 7T8/835 FL 120 X X C LITON LIGHTING LTF240W 2 FT40W/2G11 /835 CFL 120 X C-2 LITON LIGHTING LPCO2W N/A N/A N/A 120 X 2' TRACK FOR TYPE C FIXTURES C-4 LITON LIGHTING LPC04W N/A N/A N/A 120 X 4' TRACK FOR TYPE C FIXTURES C-6 LITON LIGHTING LPC06W N/A N/A N/A 120 X 6' TRACK FOR TYPE C FIXTURES C-8 LITON LIGHTING LPC08W N/A N/A N/A 120 X 8' TRACK FOR TYPE C FIXTURES D LIGHTOLIER TRIM: B7054CL FRAME–IN: 8600 1 150W A21 IND 120 X X D1 LIGHTOLIER TRIM: 8021 CCL FRAME–IN: S6132BU 1 CFTR32W/GX24q/35 CFL 120 X X E LIGHTOLIER SW4S232HPF120HI 2 F32T8/835 FL 120 X X X EMERGI–LITE LWSTX14R – INCLUDED LED 120 X X X EXR EMERGI–LITE EF 1D–ZD–BK REMOTE HEADS W JCM20-0 EMOTE BATTER 2 INCLUDED IND 120 X —T—X REMOTE EMERGENCY BATTERY TO BE LOCATED IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES: NOTE A: L=FLUORESCENT, CFL=COMPACT FLUORESCENT, IND=INCANDESCENT, MH=METAL HALIDE, HPS=HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM, LPS=LOW PRESSURE SODIUM, MV=MERCURY VAPOR, LED=LIGHT EMITTING DIODE ELECTRICAL LIGHTING DETAIL MIN/MUM OF FOUR 12 GAUGE HANGER WIRES TO STRUCTURE ABOVE (MA Y BE SLACK) LIGHT F/X7URE ` CEILING GRID (LESS THAN 56 POUNDS) CONTRACTOR TO FAS7FN FIXTURES TO GRID PER APPLICABLE BUILD/NG CODES RECESSED TROFFER SUPPORT DETAIL SCALE: NOT TO SCALE ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE DIAGRAM GL7WML aW—LIAE DIAQW AIt27M A. ANY EXISTIAG CCWITIONS IADICATED ARE BASED ON IAFORMATION PROVIDED BY 0777ERS AMS POSSIRLE LIMITED FIELD VERIFICATION. 77£ CON7RACTOR SHALL ADX5T FOR ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS AT AC ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO TW OWNER. B. ThE COV7RACTOR SHALL VISIT TAE PROL ECT SITE, REVIEW EXISTING COAV1 TIONS AGAINST 7W PLAAG, AAD FAMILIARIZE HIACELF WI77-1 77,E WORK PRIOR TO BIDl7IAG AAD START OF 77-E WORK. C. ThE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DEMOLITION OF EXISTING EOUIFACNT, DEVICES, AAD LUMINAIRES AS IADICATED AA191OR AS RLSQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION AAD CON57RLCT101V OF ThE AEW NOW. REMOVE ALL EWIPACWT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, CONDUITS, SU'PO4TS, HANGERS, ETC. THAT ARE ACT SHOWN AAD ARE REOUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN ORDER TO COUcLET£ ThE AEff WORK. D. RECESSED BOXES AAD CONDUITS CONCEALED WITHIN WALLS OR FLOORS THAT ARE TO REMAIN ARE FERMI TIED TO BE ABAADO ED IN PLACE OIL Y IF T7 E OPENINGS ARE PA Ta ED AAD 77£ COIOUCTORS ARE REAVVED. E. 77,E O#AER SHALL HAVE FIRST SAL VALE RIGHT ON ALL DEMOL 19,ED EOUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, AAD M47ERRIALS. ThE CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL D£Mt7LIShED EQUIPAENT, DEVICES' LUMINAIRE', AAD MATERIALS 771E OWAER RE..ECTS. F. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF EXISTIAG CIRCUITS AS REOUIRED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AAD LUMINAIRES 7HAT ARE NOT BEIAG REAVVED. H. ALL EXISTIAG FEEDER SIZES, OVERCU4RENT PROTECTION DEVICES, ETC. ACTED CN TT E GAE LIAE DIAGRAM AAD ALL EXISTING PAAEL RATINGS IADICATED ON Ti£ PAAEL SCY EDCLES ARE TT£ MINIA" SIZES REOUIRED. 77,E ELECTRICAL CVNTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING COADITIONS PRIOR TO BID. IF T'E EXISTING INSTALLATION DOES NOT AdEET ThE MINIAk& CRITERIA ACTED ON VC O'1LE LIRE DIAGRAM AAD 917HIN TAE PAAEL SCf£OLLES, TAE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SMALL MAKE ALL AECLESSARY A/GDIFICATIMIS TO BRIAG 77,E EXISTIAG INSTALLATION INTO 010409LIAACE WI TN TIE MINIMUM SIZES AAD/A4 AATIAGS IADICA7ED TI-EREIN AAD INaWE T4 COST OF ANY REQUIRED MODIFICATIONS IN 71,E INI TIAL BID. POS TnRID ADDI TIONAL COSTS RESX L' TING FROM AN EXISTING INSTALLATION THAT DOZES NOT ALEET ThE MINIAt M CR17ERIA IADICA7ED WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. IF ThE EXISTING INSTALLATION AfE7B OR EXCEEDS 77-E MINI" CRITERIA IADICATED, A017DIFICATIONS OF 7W EXISTING IN57ALLAT10V ARE ACT REQUIRED. EXISTING PAD MOUNT '400A FUSES SAFETY SWITCH 4 – #500 kcmil, #1/0 GROUND IN 4" CONDUIT PANEL „A„ (EXISTING) LEGEND EXIS77 &:hn&*e1 NEW engimers NEW www rw■ www.. _________�-_�__� LAW GRORENUP Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314231.5700 1314.231.0816 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Proiessional`Sael A P.0 y S9Il1I`i NSF 139 No PEO .S r T E OF i/fi4NA �0"� 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: T N M as _O LL L O cz Ct1� cn C U) U Cz CL) W C 0 Z O — w c oC � E U U)> Ch W L 4-15 m 0 CD V C13 �m vcoCLo- 3 a) 0 _LO E < U 2N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS Project Number. Sheet Number: 11256.1318 Drawn By: NLE Issue Date: E3 September 20, 2011 ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LEGEND I LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION -� WALL MOUNTED SINGLE RECEPTACLE g ELECTRIC METER BACKUP POWER NUMBER WALL MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ® SWITCHBOARD OR DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD YES NO METAL, NEMA 1 TORK W220L WALL MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE TC -2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD YES NO METAL, NEMA 1 TORK W220L WALL MOUNTED DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLESWITCH. $MOD SPST UNLESS INDICATED WITH MODIFIER. HORSEPOWER RATED WHEN USED FOR MOTOR CONTROL OR DISCONNECTING MEANS. jW Tg� 5WODIFIERS (INCLUDING CONBINATIONS THEREOF)1.: 3: 4 -WAY. (SPDT). D: DIMMER. F. BOX COVER UNIT, BUSSMANN SSU OR STY SERIES. G: GLOW HANDLE (HANDLES GLOWS WHEN SWITCH IS OFF). H: HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED. K: KEY OPERATED. M: OCCUPANCY 5ENSOR. P: PILOT LIGHT PILOT ON WHEN SWITCH IS ON). T: TIMER. V. VACANACY SENSOR. OR LOW VOLTAGE. OR: OVERRIDE. OT: OVERRIDE WITH TIMER. DTM: SPDY, CENTER OFA MOMENTARDY CONTACT. LOWERCASE LETTER: COATROL LUMINAIRE WITH SAME LETTER. C-2 ELECTRICALLY HELD 30A WALL MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ONE RECEPTACLE SWITCHED OF FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OF FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ® FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE COILING MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OR -4 WALL MOUNTED SPECIAL RECEPTACLE, NEMA CONFIGURATION AS NOTED �0 WALL MOUNTED RANGE RECEPTACLE, NEMA 14-50R UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CONTROL ZONE TURNED OFF. ASLNOTEDNTED SPECIAL RECEPTACLE, NEMA CONFIGURATION - WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET EXTERIOR CONTROL ZONES CONTROLLED BY DIGITAL TIMECLOCKS WITH PEDESTAL MOUNTED RECEPTACLE, SEE PLAN FOR TYPE OF FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET CONTROLLING THE EXTERIOR CONTROL ZONE TURNED ON. WALL MOUNTED JUNCTION/OUTLET BOX ® CEILING MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET OF FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED JUNCTION/OUTLET BOX -40 WALL MOUNTED COMBINATION TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLET O CEILING MOUNTED JUNCTION/OUTLET BOX -© WALL MOUNTED COMPUTER OUTLET W BRANCH CIRCUITING CONCEALED IN WALLS OR CEILING � FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED COMPUTER OUTLET BRANCH CIRCUITING CONCEALED IN FLOOR © CEILING MOUNTED COMPUTER OUTLET �e EXPOSED BRANCH CIRCUITING--- 7� WALL MOUNTED TELEVISION OUTLET V L_`O CES HOMERUN TO PANEL. THE NUMBER OF ARROWS INDICATES THE NUMBER OF CIRCUITS. TWO WIRES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. GROUND WIRE IS REQUIRED BUT NOT COUNTED IN HASH MARKS. ® CEILING MOUNTED TELEVISION OUTLET m TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM BACKBOARD CONDUIT UP MOTOR �-�■ CONDUIT DOWN DISCONNECT (SAFETY) SNATCH. SEE PLAN FOR RATING. MULTI -OUTLET ASSEMBLY .T� CORD AND PLUG 799'PR r" p POWER POLE DROP -CORD FA FIRE ALARM PANEL (CONTROL OR ANNUNCIATOR) AUTOMATIC HEAT DETECTOR 0 FIRE ALARM MANUAL PULL STATION AUTOMATIC SMOKE DETECTOR ❑F H FIRE ALARM MAGNETIC DOOR HOLD OPEN DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR FIRE ALARM VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE FIRE SPRINKLER ALARM BELL FIRE ALARM AUDIBLE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE FO -O FIRE SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCH F F FIRE ALARM COMBINATION AUDIBLE/VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE LJKJ FIRE SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH AND CORROSION MONITORING SYSTEM SUPERVISORY CONNECTION ® RELAY ® MAGNETIC STARTER ® DOUBLE RELAY LzCOMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER AND DISCONNECT SWITCH. SEE PLAN FOR RATING. 0 SINGLE BUTTON PUSHBUTTON STATION IR CONTROL TRANSFORMER •• TWO -BUTTON PUSHBUTTON STATION ® CONTROL TRANSFORMER ••• THREE -BUTTON PUSHBUTTON STATION ELECTRONIC SOLENOID VALVE ELECTRICAL ABBREVIATIONS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION WP WEATHERPROOF NF NON-FUSED GFI GROUND -FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR GFCI GROUND -FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER LINO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IG ISOLATED GROUND ST SHUNT -TRIP TR TAMPER-RESISTANT HACR HACR (HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION) RATED HG HOSPITAL GRADE NL NIGHTUGHT GFPE GROUND -FAULT PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT EM EMERGENCY I LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES I ISOLATED GROUND SYSTEM DETAIL ri�1—) oN0 I I Nc ( A-12 ip EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 0 I No I (WITH INTEGRAL PHOTOCELL) W ° _J SPARE I I L I SPARE 77MEOLOCK J "TC -1 " I— T'nT'v 1- I �ONO' I � C oI A-41 �- I I RECIRCULATION PUMP P-1 I —W N 0 ° _J I I SPARE I I L J SPARE 77MECLOCK "TC -2" __"7SOUARE D' CLASS 8903, TYPE L ELECR?ICALL Y HELD LIGH77NG CONTACTOR WITH NORMALLY CIRCUIT A-25 CLOSED CONTACTS MOUN7F-D IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE a o (TYPICAL) W N W z LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM SCALE: NOT TO SCALE SERVICE EQUIPMENT OR ISOLATED GROUND SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM PANELBOARD (SEE NOTE 4) EQUIPMENT GROUND BAR BONDED TO PANELBOARD CABINETS GROUNDING TERMINAL � 5 NOTE 1 INSULATED NEUTRAL BAR 14 4 OUTLET BOX EQUIPMENT GROUND TERMINAL 1N MOUIV77NG SCREWS BOND ONLY 7HE RECEPTACLE FRAME TO METALLIC OUTZET BOX METALLIC OUTLET BOX ORANGE COLOR FACE 1DEN77f7ES ISOLA 7FD GROUND NOT CONNECTED 70 RECEPTACLE FRAME SIL VER GROUNDED (NEUTRAL) TERM/NAL 7F 3 L-15OLATED GROUND 7FRM/NAL IS NOT CONNECTED TO THE RECEPTACLE FRAME AND IS THEREFORE INSULATED FROM 7HE OUTLET BOX GROUND/NG PATH "'1SOLA TSD GROUND BAR NQZ BONDED TO (INSULA 7)=D FROM) PANELBOARD CABINET 61961BAL AVW AvaIC461!E 70 THIS DETAIL• A. 7HIS DETAIL IS DIACRAMMATIC IN NA77?E AAD IS NOT INTOAD D TO IADICA7F PROPOSED CIRCUIT ROUTING. PHASE C0AVXTA4S AAD RACEIYA YS ARE NOT ShrOWN FA4 CLARITY. ALL RACEWAYS 9YALL BE SECURELY BOMCIED TO 77,E ENCLOSURES 7T,E RACEWAYS CGINIECT. B. A GREEN EQUIPMENT 6ROU10 COA XXTAR IS REQUIRED FAR EVERY APDL IAAC'E BRANCH CIRCUIT, EVERY GENERAL-PtRPOSE BNAAK,Y•! CIRCUIT, EVERY IAOI VIDUAL SAAAKY•/ CIRCUI T, AAD EVERY MCL TI -WIRE BRAAC'H CIRCUI T. "ER NO CIRaACTAAIGLS WILL A METALLIC RACEWAY SYST SM BE ACCEPTED AS TT E SALE MEANS GFS EQUIPMENT GROLWIAO. C. GROUNDED (AEZ17RAL) CAIOUCTORS ARE OAC Y REOUIRED FAR 120V LOADS OR PGL YPHASE LOADS 7HAT REQUIRE 120V POWER. D. NNEN INSTALLED PER 77,E CU4RENT NATIOWAL ELECTRICAL CODE REQUIRREN7S, AT LEAST TWO GROL'1D COADWTAR PAINS ARE REQUIRED; A11E FA4 715E RECEPTACLE GRO" AAD ATE FOR 771E RECLPmai. AVW APPrIC4&E 70 THIS DETAIL - 1. OAL Y EOUrPAENT GROUIOIAiG CaW9X TORS SMLL TER nm 7F AW THIS EIX/IPMENT GROU10 BAR. UVOER NO CIROY.INf57AA4,ES SHALL ANY ISOLATED 6ROAM71NG OR GROU1f v coAc mile (AEUIRAL) cavx'TA4S TFwiNA7F AN THIS BAR. 2. OALY 040rA11 M (AEUTRAL) CAVtVTORS SHALL 7FRMINATF ON THIS AEU7RAL BAR. U10LR AO CIRCIWTAAL^ES SHALL ANY ISOrLAT ED GROLAVIAAG A4 EQUIPMENT GROUADIAG CO DWrCI4S TERMINATE OW THIS BAR. J. ONLY ISOY,ATED GROCAOIAG C010U r6RS SHALL 7FRMINATF 01V THIS ISO>!ATED GROUND BAR. U1OER ND CIRCUKISTAAK,FS SHALL ANY EQUIPMENT GRA(A\Drx A4 GROUAVED CAIOUCTAR (AE177?AL) G'OADLCrCIRS 7DWINATE AN THIS BAR. 4. UILESS IADICA7FD OT7,ERWISE, CIRCUITS SERVED BY THIS PAAEL SHALL BE ROUTED IN DEDICATED RACEWAYS AAO SHALL Avr BE CAIIBIAED IN 771E SAME RACEWAY WITH NON- ISQLATED GRDUIO CIRCUITS. 5. ISOLATED Q40lWrAO CO1tVXrCR IS PERMITTED TO PASS 7WaZH PAAELBOAROS BUT MJST TERMINATE AT TIE SERVIOF EQUIPMENT Q4 WING TERMINAL AR AT 771E GWLWrAG TERMINAL CF ME SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM, IF APPLICABLE, UtLESS IAOICAT ED OTAERMI.SE. ISOLATED GROUND SYSTEM DETAIL SCALE: NOT TO SCALE CONDUCTOR LEGEND —GC— GROUNDED CONDUCTOR (NEUTRAL) —EGC— EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR —IG— ISOLATED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR —GEC— GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR &:hrki&el ■ NwwYcah ■ On■M ■ t=AnpM ■ 8004814M wwwschnadWI=n LAW GRORENUP Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314231.5700 f 314.231.0816 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: `,�%%%1111111111f, .S A ROY SCy /�i ��/� b� s CI+4..01 0i 139 NoPmoj/ `s, 3 SATE OF to .0 i, S p,0,G``\`� N�4N'���� 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Tale T CV co Chi 70 .L_ O FM AUTOMATIC TIMECLOCK SCHEDULE MARK CLOCK TYPE CHANNELS SWITCH/ INPUT RESERVE / ASTRONOMIC ENCLOSURE MANUFACTURER CATALOG DETAIL MARK CONTACTOR TYPE CONTACT RATING CONTACTS VOLTAGE BACKUP POWER NUMBER REFERENCE TC -1 7 DAY ELECTROMECHANICAL N A DPDT 120V YES NO METAL, NEMA 1 TORK W220L 1 E4 TC -2 7 DAY ELECTROMECHANICAL N/A DPDT 120V YES NO METAL, NEMA 1 TORK W220L 1/F4 GENERAL NOTES: 14E4 C-2 ELECTRICALLY HELD 30A A. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROGRAM ALL TIMECLOCKS AND INDIVIDUAL DIGITAL TIMECLOCK CHANNELS. COORDINATE ALL ON, OFF, 8903LG30VO2 A-41 TIMECLOCK TC -2 AND HOLIDAY SETTINGS WITH THE OWNER. (1) B. INTERIOR CONTROL ZONES CONTROLLED BY DIGITAL TIMECLOCKS WITH AN ASTRONOMIC FUNCTION SHALL HAVE THE ASTRONOMIC FUNCTION FOR THE CHANNEL �0 CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CONTROL ZONE TURNED OFF. CZ w C. EXTERIOR CONTROL ZONES CONTROLLED BY DIGITAL TIMECLOCKS WITH AN ASTRONOMIC FUNCTION SHALL HAVE THE ASTRONOMIC FUNCTION FOR THE CHANNEL U CONTROLLING THE EXTERIOR CONTROL ZONE TURNED ON. -0 W I LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES I ISOLATED GROUND SYSTEM DETAIL ri�1—) oN0 I I Nc ( A-12 ip EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 0 I No I (WITH INTEGRAL PHOTOCELL) W ° _J SPARE I I L I SPARE 77MEOLOCK J "TC -1 " I— T'nT'v 1- I �ONO' I � C oI A-41 �- I I RECIRCULATION PUMP P-1 I —W N 0 ° _J I I SPARE I I L J SPARE 77MECLOCK "TC -2" __"7SOUARE D' CLASS 8903, TYPE L ELECR?ICALL Y HELD LIGH77NG CONTACTOR WITH NORMALLY CIRCUIT A-25 CLOSED CONTACTS MOUN7F-D IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE a o (TYPICAL) W N W z LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM SCALE: NOT TO SCALE SERVICE EQUIPMENT OR ISOLATED GROUND SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM PANELBOARD (SEE NOTE 4) EQUIPMENT GROUND BAR BONDED TO PANELBOARD CABINETS GROUNDING TERMINAL � 5 NOTE 1 INSULATED NEUTRAL BAR 14 4 OUTLET BOX EQUIPMENT GROUND TERMINAL 1N MOUIV77NG SCREWS BOND ONLY 7HE RECEPTACLE FRAME TO METALLIC OUTZET BOX METALLIC OUTLET BOX ORANGE COLOR FACE 1DEN77f7ES ISOLA 7FD GROUND NOT CONNECTED 70 RECEPTACLE FRAME SIL VER GROUNDED (NEUTRAL) TERM/NAL 7F 3 L-15OLATED GROUND 7FRM/NAL IS NOT CONNECTED TO THE RECEPTACLE FRAME AND IS THEREFORE INSULATED FROM 7HE OUTLET BOX GROUND/NG PATH "'1SOLA TSD GROUND BAR NQZ BONDED TO (INSULA 7)=D FROM) PANELBOARD CABINET 61961BAL AVW AvaIC461!E 70 THIS DETAIL• A. 7HIS DETAIL IS DIACRAMMATIC IN NA77?E AAD IS NOT INTOAD D TO IADICA7F PROPOSED CIRCUIT ROUTING. PHASE C0AVXTA4S AAD RACEIYA YS ARE NOT ShrOWN FA4 CLARITY. ALL RACEWAYS 9YALL BE SECURELY BOMCIED TO 77,E ENCLOSURES 7T,E RACEWAYS CGINIECT. B. A GREEN EQUIPMENT 6ROU10 COA XXTAR IS REQUIRED FAR EVERY APDL IAAC'E BRANCH CIRCUIT, EVERY GENERAL-PtRPOSE BNAAK,Y•! CIRCUIT, EVERY IAOI VIDUAL SAAAKY•/ CIRCUI T, AAD EVERY MCL TI -WIRE BRAAC'H CIRCUI T. "ER NO CIRaACTAAIGLS WILL A METALLIC RACEWAY SYST SM BE ACCEPTED AS TT E SALE MEANS GFS EQUIPMENT GROLWIAO. C. GROUNDED (AEZ17RAL) CAIOUCTORS ARE OAC Y REOUIRED FAR 120V LOADS OR PGL YPHASE LOADS 7HAT REQUIRE 120V POWER. D. NNEN INSTALLED PER 77,E CU4RENT NATIOWAL ELECTRICAL CODE REQUIRREN7S, AT LEAST TWO GROL'1D COADWTAR PAINS ARE REQUIRED; A11E FA4 715E RECEPTACLE GRO" AAD ATE FOR 771E RECLPmai. AVW APPrIC4&E 70 THIS DETAIL - 1. OAL Y EOUrPAENT GROUIOIAiG CaW9X TORS SMLL TER nm 7F AW THIS EIX/IPMENT GROU10 BAR. UVOER NO CIROY.INf57AA4,ES SHALL ANY ISOLATED 6ROAM71NG OR GROU1f v coAc mile (AEUIRAL) cavx'TA4S TFwiNA7F AN THIS BAR. 2. OALY 040rA11 M (AEUTRAL) CAVtVTORS SHALL 7FRMINATF ON THIS AEU7RAL BAR. U10LR AO CIRCIWTAAL^ES SHALL ANY ISOrLAT ED GROLAVIAAG A4 EQUIPMENT GROUADIAG CO DWrCI4S TERMINATE OW THIS BAR. J. ONLY ISOY,ATED GROCAOIAG C010U r6RS SHALL 7FRMINATF 01V THIS ISO>!ATED GROUND BAR. U1OER ND CIRCUKISTAAK,FS SHALL ANY EQUIPMENT GRA(A\Drx A4 GROUAVED CAIOUCTAR (AE177?AL) G'OADLCrCIRS 7DWINATE AN THIS BAR. 4. UILESS IADICA7FD OT7,ERWISE, CIRCUITS SERVED BY THIS PAAEL SHALL BE ROUTED IN DEDICATED RACEWAYS AAO SHALL Avr BE CAIIBIAED IN 771E SAME RACEWAY WITH NON- ISQLATED GRDUIO CIRCUITS. 5. ISOLATED Q40lWrAO CO1tVXrCR IS PERMITTED TO PASS 7WaZH PAAELBOAROS BUT MJST TERMINATE AT TIE SERVIOF EQUIPMENT Q4 WING TERMINAL AR AT 771E GWLWrAG TERMINAL CF ME SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM, IF APPLICABLE, UtLESS IAOICAT ED OTAERMI.SE. ISOLATED GROUND SYSTEM DETAIL SCALE: NOT TO SCALE CONDUCTOR LEGEND —GC— GROUNDED CONDUCTOR (NEUTRAL) —EGC— EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR —IG— ISOLATED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR —GEC— GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR &:hrki&el ■ NwwYcah ■ On■M ■ t=AnpM ■ 8004814M wwwschnadWI=n LAW GRORENUP Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314231.5700 f 314.231.0816 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: `,�%%%1111111111f, .S A ROY SCy /�i ��/� b� s CI+4..01 0i 139 NoPmoj/ `s, 3 SATE OF to .0 i, S p,0,G``\`� N�4N'���� 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Tale T CV co Chi 70 .L_ O FM CONTACTOR SCHEDULE MARK CONTACTOR TYPE CONTACT RATING CONTACT QTY. N. 0. N.C. COIL VOLTAGE MANUFACTURER CATALOG CIRCUITS CONTROLLED NUMBER CONTACTOR CONTROLLED BY: DETAIL REFERENCE C-1 ELECTRICALLY HELD 30A 0 3 120V SQUARE D 8903LG30VO2 A-12 TIMECLOCK TC -1 14E4 C-2 ELECTRICALLY HELD 30A 0 3 120V SQUARE D 8903LG30VO2 A-41 TIMECLOCK TC -2 1/E4 I LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES I ISOLATED GROUND SYSTEM DETAIL ri�1—) oN0 I I Nc ( A-12 ip EXTERIOR SIGNAGE 0 I No I (WITH INTEGRAL PHOTOCELL) W ° _J SPARE I I L I SPARE 77MEOLOCK J "TC -1 " I— T'nT'v 1- I �ONO' I � C oI A-41 �- I I RECIRCULATION PUMP P-1 I —W N 0 ° _J I I SPARE I I L J SPARE 77MECLOCK "TC -2" __"7SOUARE D' CLASS 8903, TYPE L ELECR?ICALL Y HELD LIGH77NG CONTACTOR WITH NORMALLY CIRCUIT A-25 CLOSED CONTACTS MOUN7F-D IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE a o (TYPICAL) W N W z LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM SCALE: NOT TO SCALE SERVICE EQUIPMENT OR ISOLATED GROUND SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM PANELBOARD (SEE NOTE 4) EQUIPMENT GROUND BAR BONDED TO PANELBOARD CABINETS GROUNDING TERMINAL � 5 NOTE 1 INSULATED NEUTRAL BAR 14 4 OUTLET BOX EQUIPMENT GROUND TERMINAL 1N MOUIV77NG SCREWS BOND ONLY 7HE RECEPTACLE FRAME TO METALLIC OUTZET BOX METALLIC OUTLET BOX ORANGE COLOR FACE 1DEN77f7ES ISOLA 7FD GROUND NOT CONNECTED 70 RECEPTACLE FRAME SIL VER GROUNDED (NEUTRAL) TERM/NAL 7F 3 L-15OLATED GROUND 7FRM/NAL IS NOT CONNECTED TO THE RECEPTACLE FRAME AND IS THEREFORE INSULATED FROM 7HE OUTLET BOX GROUND/NG PATH "'1SOLA TSD GROUND BAR NQZ BONDED TO (INSULA 7)=D FROM) PANELBOARD CABINET 61961BAL AVW AvaIC461!E 70 THIS DETAIL• A. 7HIS DETAIL IS DIACRAMMATIC IN NA77?E AAD IS NOT INTOAD D TO IADICA7F PROPOSED CIRCUIT ROUTING. PHASE C0AVXTA4S AAD RACEIYA YS ARE NOT ShrOWN FA4 CLARITY. ALL RACEWAYS 9YALL BE SECURELY BOMCIED TO 77,E ENCLOSURES 7T,E RACEWAYS CGINIECT. B. A GREEN EQUIPMENT 6ROU10 COA XXTAR IS REQUIRED FAR EVERY APDL IAAC'E BRANCH CIRCUIT, EVERY GENERAL-PtRPOSE BNAAK,Y•! CIRCUIT, EVERY IAOI VIDUAL SAAAKY•/ CIRCUI T, AAD EVERY MCL TI -WIRE BRAAC'H CIRCUI T. "ER NO CIRaACTAAIGLS WILL A METALLIC RACEWAY SYST SM BE ACCEPTED AS TT E SALE MEANS GFS EQUIPMENT GROLWIAO. C. GROUNDED (AEZ17RAL) CAIOUCTORS ARE OAC Y REOUIRED FAR 120V LOADS OR PGL YPHASE LOADS 7HAT REQUIRE 120V POWER. D. NNEN INSTALLED PER 77,E CU4RENT NATIOWAL ELECTRICAL CODE REQUIRREN7S, AT LEAST TWO GROL'1D COADWTAR PAINS ARE REQUIRED; A11E FA4 715E RECEPTACLE GRO" AAD ATE FOR 771E RECLPmai. AVW APPrIC4&E 70 THIS DETAIL - 1. OAL Y EOUrPAENT GROUIOIAiG CaW9X TORS SMLL TER nm 7F AW THIS EIX/IPMENT GROU10 BAR. UVOER NO CIROY.INf57AA4,ES SHALL ANY ISOLATED 6ROAM71NG OR GROU1f v coAc mile (AEUIRAL) cavx'TA4S TFwiNA7F AN THIS BAR. 2. OALY 040rA11 M (AEUTRAL) CAVtVTORS SHALL 7FRMINATF ON THIS AEU7RAL BAR. U10LR AO CIRCIWTAAL^ES SHALL ANY ISOrLAT ED GROLAVIAAG A4 EQUIPMENT GROUADIAG CO DWrCI4S TERMINATE OW THIS BAR. J. ONLY ISOY,ATED GROCAOIAG C010U r6RS SHALL 7FRMINATF 01V THIS ISO>!ATED GROUND BAR. U1OER ND CIRCUKISTAAK,FS SHALL ANY EQUIPMENT GRA(A\Drx A4 GROUAVED CAIOUCTAR (AE177?AL) G'OADLCrCIRS 7DWINATE AN THIS BAR. 4. UILESS IADICA7FD OT7,ERWISE, CIRCUITS SERVED BY THIS PAAEL SHALL BE ROUTED IN DEDICATED RACEWAYS AAO SHALL Avr BE CAIIBIAED IN 771E SAME RACEWAY WITH NON- ISQLATED GRDUIO CIRCUITS. 5. ISOLATED Q40lWrAO CO1tVXrCR IS PERMITTED TO PASS 7WaZH PAAELBOAROS BUT MJST TERMINATE AT TIE SERVIOF EQUIPMENT Q4 WING TERMINAL AR AT 771E GWLWrAG TERMINAL CF ME SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM, IF APPLICABLE, UtLESS IAOICAT ED OTAERMI.SE. ISOLATED GROUND SYSTEM DETAIL SCALE: NOT TO SCALE CONDUCTOR LEGEND —GC— GROUNDED CONDUCTOR (NEUTRAL) —EGC— EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR —IG— ISOLATED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR —GEC— GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR &:hrki&el ■ NwwYcah ■ On■M ■ t=AnpM ■ 8004814M wwwschnadWI=n LAW GRORENUP Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314231.5700 f 314.231.0816 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: `,�%%%1111111111f, .S A ROY SCy /�i ��/� b� s CI+4..01 0i 139 NoPmoj/ `s, 3 SATE OF to .0 i, S p,0,G``\`� N�4N'���� 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Tale T CV co Chi 70 .L_ O FM This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Tide: ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS Project Number. Sheet Number: 11256.1318 Drawn By: NILE Issue Date: E4 September 20, 2011 WO Ca U) Cn+-� U) Cl) CD 0 CV (1) Z U) �0 O CZ w _13) o .0) U (n> -0 W ■ ri }+ _ C� U a) ca W Cz 4_0 0 �e 01) 0 V L_`O CES N 2 This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Tide: ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS Project Number. Sheet Number: 11256.1318 Drawn By: NILE Issue Date: E4 September 20, 2011 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 260000 - IDECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section supplements all sections of the Specifications for Division 26, Division 27, and Division 28 and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the Drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of approved electrical systems. B. The Drawings, General Conditions and General Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section and the other Sections of Division 26, Division 27, and Division 28 of the specifications. Where conflicts arise between these documents, the more stringent provision will be applicable, subject to the interpretation of the Engineer. C. Furnish all labor, material, services, and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and adjustment of dl materials and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or noted on the Drawings, and its delivery to the Owner, complete in all respects and ready for use. D. Where plans indicate fixtures or equipment will be furnMed by this Contractor for installation by other Contractors, this Contractor shall furnish all such equipment, complete in all respects and ready for installation. Drawings, instructions, and manuals supplied with equipment shall be carefully preserved and turned over to the installing Contractor. E. Where plans indicate fixtures or equipment will be furnished by others, this Contractor shall provide all rough -in and supplies and shall connect such equipment to the electrical system. Drawings, instructions, and manuals supplied with equipment shall be carefully preserved and turned over to the Architect. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. "Work" is hereby defined as, "The construction and services required by the Contract Documents whether completed or partially completed and includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractors obligations. The work may constitute the whole or a part of the eroJect" B. 'Fumish is hereby defined as, "To supply and deliver, unload, and inspect for damage." C. "Install" is hereby defined as, "To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, dean, connect, and place into operation into the work." D. "Provide is hereby defined as, "To furnish and install." E. "Connect" is hereby defined as, "To bring service to the equipment and make final attachment induding necessary switches, outlets, boxes, terminations, etc." F. "Conceded" is hereby defined as, "Hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, in crawl spaces, or buried." G. "Exposed" is hereby defined as, 'Not installed underground nor concealed as defined by the Seecifications." H. "Drawings is hereby defined as, 'AII plans, details, equipment schedules, diagrams, sketches, etc. issued for the construction of the work.' 1. "Conduit" is hereby defined as, "Conduit, and dl required fittings, pull boxes, hangers, and other supports and accessories related to such conduit.' 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Perform work in accordance with the applicable Building Code, Electrical Code, Fire Code, Mechanical Code, Plumbing Code, Energy Code, and all other applicable codes, amendments, and ordinances. Also perform all work in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) including Fire Morshol(s). r i is Includin an Tenant B. Perform work in accordance with Landlord equ tamer g y Criteria Manuals and Lease Exhibits, where applicable. C. Perform work in accordance with the a plicable utilit companies serving the P Y project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the work. D. Recognized Standards: Design, manufacture, testing and method of 'istallation of all a aratus and materials furnished under the r uirements of these Specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), American Societ for Testing and Materials ASTM), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Electrical Code NEC), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA), and American Institute of Steal Construction (AISC). E. The Contract Documents shall take precedence where the Contract Documents exceed code, Landlord, utility, or recognized standards requirements. 1.04 PERMITS AND FEES: Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the work under this Contract shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor is responsible to obtain, fully understand, and coordinate the work with the complete set of Contract Documents. Any required corrections, including all associated costs, arising from issues caused by the Contractor's failure to understand and/or coordinate the work with the complete set of Contract Documents are the Contractors sole responsibility. B. Work under these sections is diagrammatic unless indicated otherwise and is intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general arrangement of equipment, conduit, and outlets. Follow these Drawings in laying out the work and verify spaces for the installation of these materials and equipment. Wherever a question exists as to the exact intended location of outlets or equipment, obtain instructions from the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with the work. C. Notify the Architect/Engineer for resolution if a discrepancy is discovered within the Contract Documents. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect/Engineer of discrepancies shall result in the resolution becoming the Contractors responsibility and subject to the Architect/Engineers review and possble rejection. Should the Architect/Engineer reject a discrepancy resdution of which they were not notified, the Contractor is fully responsible to correct the installation, including all associated costs, until approval of the installation is lven b the Architect ineer. 9 Y /E►09 1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Th n r sin II vi' h r' i e r view existin conditions in the e Co t actor a sit t a p oiect s t, e q age st Contract Documents, and familiarize himself with the work prior to bidding and f he work. B si nim the Contract the Contractor acknowled es the site start o t Y 9 9 � 9 vi i h m l n xi in i i ns are act s t as been co p steal a d the a st g cord t o opted. B. Maintain continuit of existin circuits as re uired to rovide ower to remainin Y 9 q P P 9 e ui ment devices and luminaires that are not beim removed. q P � � 9 C. The Contractor shall nota the Architect ineer of field discre ncies. The fY �►9 Pa Contractor assumes full responsibility of adjusting for discrepancies of which the Architect ineer is not informed. 1.07 SHOP DRAWINGSg A. Fumish the Architect/Engineer shop drawing portfolios containing names of manufacturer n f i m nt on h r' a d cut sheets o u e to be used t o o ct. Use � D P Je manufacturer's specification sheets identified by number indicated on drawings or schedules. Indicate catalog number on the cut sheets. Provide shop drawings for metering equipment, ponelboords, luminaires, wiring devices, lighting controls, enclosed switches su a rotection devic and fire detection and alarms tems induding fully engineered drawings, voltage drop calculations, and battery talc I ti ns. Fir i n I rm drawin all bear the r vi w stom f in u a o a detect on o d a o s ah e e a t e 9 P Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. Shop Drawings are reviewed only for general compliance with the Contract Documents. Dimensions, quantities, and details are not checked during submittal review. Review of the submittals does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing all materials, equipment, and accessories necessary for a complete and i s tem meetin the r uirements of the ro ct and the intent of the operat oval Ys g eq p je Contract Documents. The responsibility for coordination of substituted materials and ui ent lies solei with the substitutin Contractor. e9 Pm Y 9 A r I I not r lieve the Contractor from re onsibilit for errors on the C pp ova sinal a sp y shop drawings. D. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, induding the reasons for the deviations. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AII coin onents shall be listed and classified b Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitablepfor the purpose specified and indicateyd and free of all rust/corrosion or any visible damage. All items not complying with this requirement shall be replaced without any change in the Contract amount. B. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials of the same type or classification and used for the some purpose shall be products of the same manufacturer. Use only new, un -weathered, and unused material, except as specifically noted. C. Equipment performance and accessories shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and specified herein. Inclusion 1n both locations is not a prerequisite to Inclusion in the Contract Equipment and accessories specified in either location shall be included in the Contract. Provide all necessary accessories and connections as required for a complete, functional system, induding all required components reasonably inferred to as necessary although such components may or may not be specifically indicated in the Contract Documents. D. Code or utility company requirements shall supersede any conflicting requirements of the Drawings and/or Specifications. E. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and the requirements of utility companies. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials on site and inspect for damage; protect all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing in a dean, dry space above grade and maintaining factory wrapping. B. Handle all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosures, and finishes. Exercise the necessary precautionary methods to prevent scratching or defacing of all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials. 1.10 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE: The Electrical Contractor shall furnish a complete parts and labor warranty and guarantee on all systems installed under this Contract for a period of one year from Owner acceptance of the completed facility. This warranty and guarantee shall cover all failures of any equipment, materials or installation, unless such failure is directly attributable to vandalism, or causes other than defects in material or workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The manufacturers listed are listed to set minimum standards for quality, design, and functionality. The products of other manufacturers may be submitted, at the Contractors option, during shop drawing review unless indicated otherwise. The products of other manufacturers shall meet or exceed all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor accepts all responsibility for costs and coordination issues arising out of the substitution of materials or equipment, and the coordination of such substitutions with all other contractors and subcontractors. B. The Contractor may use any of the following materials at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State and local authorities and any utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Work lines and established heights shall be in strict accordance with architectural drawings and specifications insofar as these drawings and specifications extend. Verify all dimensions shown and establish all elevations and detailed dimensions not shown. B. Promptly report to the Architect/Engineer any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of the work, which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work. C. Plan, lay out, and coordinate the work with all trades well enough in advance so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference to work that has not been completed and work that is in progress. Inform all trades of openings required for the work and provide all special frames, sleeves, and anchor bolts required. The electrical layout may be altered to suit the conditions with Engineer approval, prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractors responsibility. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for dl extra cutting and patching made necessary by his failure to properly direct such work at the correct time. D. Wherever conduit runs in or on ceilings or walls, this Contractor shall arrange the run of conduit in such a manner that it does not interfere with grilles, diffusers, outlet boxes, luminaires, or other items while providing for maximum headroom, where no ceiling height is established or indicated on the Drawings. Maintain access to equipment requiring service when selecting mounting elevations. E. Perform all work in conformity with the Contract Documents and afford other trades reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work. Properly connect and coordinate this work with the work of other trades at such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with their work. F. Manufacturer's instruction sheets shall be followed explicitly in the installation of all equipment. Where manufacturers instruction sheets conflict with requirements of these specifications or the Drawings, such conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for clarification. G. Although all such work is not specifically indicated, provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. H. Verify and coordinate dl requirements and installation details of all materials and equipment that are to be furnished under other Divisions and installed or connected under Division 26, Division 27, or Division 28 prior to rough -in. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. As such, the Contractor is responsible to obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturers wiring diagrams, and monufocturer s Instructions for equipment furnished under other sections, determine connection locations and requirements, sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment, sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment, and verify that proper power supply is available prior to subcontractors ordering equipment. Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supply and inform Engineer of any deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Fire Rated Assemblies: The Contractor shall familiarize himself with all fire rated construction and install his work so as to maintain the integrity of the fire code rating. Maintain rating of fire rated and smoke rated construction. Sed annular space around conduits. For fire and smoke rated floors, walls and partitions, use UL listed material that maintains fire rated wall and floor integrity. B. Roof Penetrations: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation. Where required, roofing penetrations shall be flashed and weather sealed by the roofing manufacturers authorized roofing contractor at this Contractors expense. 3 Fl A TY NTR 3 0 ETD QU U CO OL A. Provide tests as necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status, and suitable operation of each system. B. Protect and saf uard an existin service lines and utilities structures the location of which is known to the Contractor. C. Paint all electrical equipment and materials located on exterior walls or on the roof where exposed to view, where visble from 6'-0' above grade form any property line, to match the surroundin surfaces. Coordinate oint color with the 9 P Architect. D. Install all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials securely and in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with all applicable NECA standards and all applicable NEMA standards. E. Install all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials plumb and level and align and adjust for satisfactory operation. F. Aim and adjust all luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution as directed. Include all equipment and personnel expenses required for adjustment of luminaires with aiming or focusing capabilities. 3.04 ERECTION A. Rigging: Arrange for all labor and equipment required for the proper installation of the electrical equipment in the locations indicated on the Drawings. Where crane rental or other erection is required, such costs shall be included in the Electrical Contract unless specific arrangements are made with the General Contractor to cover these costs. B. Supplemental Framing: Provide any supplementary structural framing required for attachment of hangers or other devices supporting electrical equipment. Coordinate all required supplemental framing with the Structural Engineer. 3.05 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT: Install all equipment, starters, switches, receptacles, and boxes so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair. If concealed, provide access doors. Provide fire rated access doors where required by the fire resistance rating of the wall or ceiling in which the door is installed. 3.06 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND PIERCING A. Cut openings through walls and surfaces in a neat workmanlike manner. Cut openings only as large as required for the installation and leave surfaces around openings smooth and finished to match surrounding surface. B. Obtain written permission of the Architect/Engineer before cutting or piercing structural members. Use craftsmen skilled in their respective trades for cutting, fitting, repairing, patching of plaster, and finishing of materials including carpentry work, metal work or concrete work required for this work. C. Do not weaken walls, partitions, or floors with cutting. Holes required to be cut in floors must be drilled without breaking out around the holes. D. Patch all openings resulting from the installation or removal of electrical equipment or materials. E. Provide and maintain tem oro i i rri r art t ons or dust ba e s ade uate to revert the P rY P q P spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. F. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Subcontractors. 3.07 CLEANING, ADJUSTING, AND REPAIR A. Clean electrical parts to remove harmful materials. Clean exposed surfaces of all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials of all dirt, debris, splatter, and other deleterious materials; follow the manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning as applicable. Clean interior of all boxes, enclosures, and cabinets to remove dirt, debris, and other material. B. Adjust all flush mounted equipment, boxes, cabinets, and enclosures such that they are flush with finished wall or flooring material. C. Replace or refinish damaged equipment, devices, luminaires, materials, and surfaces where marring or disfigurement has occurred and replace any lamps and ballasts that expire before the Owner's acceptance of the project. 3.08 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. T in : T it est est the ant e s tem under statin conditions over a sufficient 9 Ys oP 9 period of time to prove the proper capacity, operation, and performance of all equipment, devices, systems, etc. B. Inspection: Obtain all required certificates of inspection and approval from all City and State Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3.09 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: At project closeout, provide one printed copy and one electronic copy of project record drawings to the Owner. These as -built drawings hllrmin i a a e a at the construct on site throughout construction and shall be updated on a daily basis. These drawings shall be available for review by the Architect/Engineer at all times. Information contained on project record drawings shall include, actual locations of all equipment, devices, and luminaires, actual circuitin arran ents actual routin of all underfloor conduits actual routin of conduits larger than 2 inches, actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes, actual locations of all items requiring maintenance and inspection, and actual locations of components and circuiting and switching arrangements of fighting controls. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: At project closeout, submit to the Architect/Engineer two copies of descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data for all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials used. Include maintenance procedures, intervals, wiring diagrams, and parts list of each item installed under this contract. All manufacturers warranty information, certificates, and test reports shall be included with this submittal. AII information shall be neatly bound In a three ring binder with tabs separating this information organized by specification section. If applicable, include detailed fire detection and alarm system troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix, one printed copy and one electronic copy of fire detection and alarm system preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA 7Zand detailed but easy to read fire detection and alarm explanation of procedures to be used by non-technical administrative personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is being conducted and for fire drills. C. Maintenance Materials: At project closeout, fumish to the Owner two of each different enclosure and cabinet key, including ponelboard keys and fire alarm cabinet keys, two spare fuses of each type and size and one fuse puller, and, if applicable, all tools, software, and documentation necessary to modify the fire detection and alarm system using Ownsr s personnel, one CD-ROM copy of all fire detection and alarm software not resident in read -only -memory and the maintenance contract for the fire detection and alarm system. D. Test Reports: At project closeout, submit to the Architect/Engineer the Earth Resistance Test Report for grounding and bonding, and if applicable, the completed NFPA 72 'Inspection and Test Form and completed NFPA 72 -Record of Completion" for fire detection and alarm systems. E. Certificates: All certificates of compliance with testing or regulatory requirements shall be submitted to the Architect for review. A copy of all certificates shall be Included in the operation and maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION SEC710N 260501 - EIECTRICAL DEi W710N PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: Materials and equipment for patching and extending work as specified in individual sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions as required by the Electrical General Conditions, field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings, and abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. B. The demolition work indicated on the Drawings is intended to convey the scope of the demolition work involved. If demolition plans are not provided, the Contractor is responsible to demolish existing as required to allow for installation and construction of the work. C. Beginning of demolition means Contractor accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed. B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company and the Owner. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service aurin construction as r uired for the a uencin of the work or the Owners need 9 e9 eq 9 for continued operations. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced In such operations. D. Existing Power, Telephone, and Fire Alarm Services: Maintain existing systems in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable systems only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. Notify all affected parties (Owner, Authority Having Jurisdiction, utility company, Landlord, etc.) at least 48 hours before partially or complete'y disabling system. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply and remove exposed abandoned conduit, induding abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed. Disconnect and remove abandoned ponelboards and distribution equipment, electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed, and abandoned luminaires induding brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. D. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. E. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access parcel as appropriate. F. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified and required by Code. G. Dispose of all equipment not reused as part of the work. The Owner shall have first salvage rights on all materials and equipment. H. Maintain continuity of circuits as needed to provide power to remaining devices, fixtures, or equipment not being removed. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused. B. Ponelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections, replace damaged circuit breakers, and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. C. Luminaires: Remove, clean, replace, and reconnect existing luminaires within the limits of the new work. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces and rinse with dean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts and broken electrical parts. END OF SECTION SECTION 260519 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required. B. Armored cable (Type AC) may be substituted for wire and conduit systems at the Electrical Contractors option, only in concealed locations and where approved by local and national codes and amendments. AC cable in exposed locations is not permitted. C. Metal clad (Type MCI cable may be substituted for wire and conduit systems at the Electrical Contractors option, only In concealed locations and where approved by local and national codes and amendments. MC cable in exposed locations is not permitted. D. Use solid conductors for all conal ct 1 W u ors 0 A G and smaller. Use stranded conductors for all conductors 8 AWG and larger and for control circuits. E. Use 12 AWG conductors, minimum, for all branch circuits unless indicated otherwise or as modified as follows: 1. 20 A, 120 V circuits longer that 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2. 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet- 8 AWG, for voltage drop. 3. 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. F. Use the lar of the manufacturers recomm n 4 A f II e dations or 1 WG conductors or a control circuits. G. Conductor Color Coding: Color code conductors as follows unless otherwise required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 1. 208Y/120 V, 3 phase, 4 Wire System: Phase A - Black; Phase B - Red; Phase C - Blue; Neutral/Grounded -White. 2. Equipment Ground, AII Systems: Green. 3. Isolated Ground, AII Systems: Green with yellow stripe. 4. Travelers for 3-Woy and 4 -Way Switching: Pink. 5. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code. 2.02 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE: Copper conductor with 600 V insulation rated at 90 degrees C, type THHN for dry locations and type XHHW for damp or wet locations. 2.03 ARMORED CABLE: NFPA 70 Type AC cable with copper conductors with 600 V insulation rated at 90 degrees C, type THHN; aluminum or steel armor, sheath listed and identified for grounding. Provide a separate equipment grounding wire for all AC cable used. No exceptions. 2.04 METAL CLAD CABLE: NFPA 70 Type MC cable with copper conductors with 600 V insulation rated at 90 Negroes C, type THHN or type XHHW, aluminum or steel armor, sheath listed and identified for grounding. Provide a separate equipment grounding wire for all MC cable used. No exceptions. Provide additional isolated/insulated grounding conductor where indicated or required. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for the environment of installed location. 2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: Use twist -on insulated spring connectors, mechanical connectors, or compression connectors nor conductor sizes 8 AWG and smaller. Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors for conductor sizes 6 AWG and larger. Do not use push -in wire connectors as a substitute for twist -on insulated spring connectors. B. Wiring Connectors for Terminations: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required for conductor sizes 8 AWG and larger. Use crim ed terminals for all contr I it occult conductor connections. P 1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs and compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified. 2. Where over -sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than re ired for the ratin of the overcurrent rotective qu 9 P device. C. Twist -on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 105 degrees C for standard a lications and 150 de rees C for hi m I' i pp g gin to peratura app scat ons; prefilled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. D. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted or set -screw type. E. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type, hex type, or indentor type crimp configuration. F. Crimped Terminals: Nylon -insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection to be made. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: Clean racewa thorou hl t r f o emove oral n materials before installin Ys 9 Y 9 9 conductors and cables. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Circuiting Requirements: 1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices and include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 feet of location shown. 2. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is permitted, under the following conditions: a. Provide not more than six current -carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current -carrying conductors. b. Increase size of conductors as r uired t account for am acit eq o p y derating. c. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors. 3. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise in n f n I r n dkated ahari o sutra ou Ned 9 /9 conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is permitted where not otherwise prohibited, except for branch circuits fed from ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) and arc fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) circuit breakers, branch circuits fed from feed -through protection of GFCI receptacles, branch circuits with dimming controls, or when indicated by the wire counts shown on the drawings. B. Installation in Raceway. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. C. Secure and support conductors in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. Do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system. Do not provide support from suspend ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles. D. Terminate cables using suitable fittings. Use listed fittings and anti -short, insulated bushings where applicable. Out cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. Do not use direct -bearing set -screw type fittings for cables with aluminum armor. E. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet Where conductors are installed In enclosures for future termination by others, provide a minimum of 5 feet of slack. F. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, ponelboards and other equipment enclosures. G. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. H. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least or equivdent to unspliced conductors. Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing for dry and damp locations. Apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape for damp locations. Use heat shrink tubing for wet locations. I. Field -Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation, apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible. J. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungrounded conductors at each piece of feeder or branch -circuit distribution equipment with premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. K. Provide wire and cable markers identifying circuit number or other designation indicated at each source and load connection, within boxes when more than one circuit is present, and within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure. L Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. END OF SECTION SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRODES: Use copper, 3/4 inch, 10 foot long rods for rod electrodes and 4 AWG, 20 foot long bare copper wire for concrete encased electrodes, where applicable. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES, Use bronze mechanical connectors. Wire shall be stranded copper wire sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of metal underground water pipe, metal frame of the building, concrete -encased electrode, metal aboveground water piping system, metal aboveground gas piping system, rod electrode(s), and isolated grounding system as applicable to this project per NFPA 70 requirements. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. No exceptions. C. Provide isolated grounding conductor for circuits supplying circuits designated as 'IG' on the Drawings. In addition to the conduit grounding system, install a separate green, insulated conductor and a separate green with yellow stripe, insulated, isolated ground conductor within each branch circuit raceway. Isolated grounding conductors shall be electrically continuous and iodated from the isolated grounding receptacle to the isolated ground bus in the upstream ponelboard or load center. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Measure grounding resistance using a 3 point Megger test. Maximum acceptable grounding resistance shall be 5 ohms. If tested grounding resistance exceeds 5 ohms, provide additional electrodes as required to reduce grounding resistance to 5 ohms or less. END OF SECTION SECTION 260829 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR i]EC7RICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion -resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed at" members; galvanized or painted. C. Anchors and Fasteners: Obtain permission from the Structural Engineer before using powder -actuated anchors. Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts as approved by the Structural Engineer for concrete structural elements. Use beam damps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or welded fasteners for steel structural elements. Use self -drilling anchors or expansion anchors as approved by the Structural Engineer for concrete surfaces. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners for hollow masonry, plaster, and gypsum board partitions. Use expansion anchors or preset inserts for solid masonry walls. Use sheet metal screws for sheet metal elements and wood screws for wood elements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Do not fasten supports to, pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. B. Obtain ermission from Structural En ineer before drillin or tin p g g kxa t il structural members. C. Support Independent of ceiling suspension wires. D. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon -head bolts to present neat appearance with ade uate strep th and ri ldit . Uses rim lock washers under all nuts. q 9 Q Y P 9 E. Install surface -mounted cobineLs and ponelboords with minimum of four anchors. F. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and ponelboards 1 inch off wall. G. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and ponelboords recessed in hollow partitions. H. Install cable supports for all low voltage wiring not routed in conduit. Random installation of wiring will not be acceptable. END OF SECTION PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor may use any of the following conduit materials, at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, Local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected conduit materid Is the sole re onsbility of the installing Contractor. B. Conduit Size: Comply with NFPA 70; 1/2 inch minimum unless indicated otherwise. C. Underground Installations: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, plastic coated conduit, thickwall nonmetallic conduit, or thinwall nonmetallic conduit; 3/4 inch minimum. D. Outdoor Locations Above Grade. Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, or intermediate metal conduit. Nonmetallic conduit is not permitted above grade. E. In Slab Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, Intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or thiclkwall nonmetallic conduit, 3/4 inch minimum or 1/2 inch for conduits crossing each other. Coordinate with the Structural Engineer for restrictions and limitations on conduits installed in slab above grade. F. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Nonmetallic conduit is not permitted above grade. i T r i min m n i l G D Locat ons: Use n id steel condu t i d du u co du intermediate metol rY 9 � 9 t. conduit, or electrical metallic tubing for both concealed and exposed conduits. 2.02 METAL CONDUIT Rigid steel conduit (ANSI C80.1), rigid aluminum conduit (ANSI C80.5) or intermediate metal conduit IMC . Use NEMA FB 1 fiittin s and conduit bodies m i I 9 oter a to match conduit. 2.03 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT: NEMA RN 1 rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating. Use NEMA FB 1 steel fittings and conduit bodies with external PVC coating to match conduit. 2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT. Interiocked steel construction with NEMA FB 1 fittin s. 9 2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT. Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket with NEMA FB 1 fittings. 2.06 ELECTRICAL METAWC TUBING (EMT): ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. Use NEMA FB 1 fittings and conduit bodies; steel or malleable iron, compression or set screw type. 2.07 NONMETAWC CONDUIT: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 or 80 PVC with NEMA TC 3 fittings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All conduit shall be concealed in all areas except enclosed mechanical and electrical service rooms. Conduit shall not be installed exposed in any areas, interior or exterior, without the specific written approval of the Architect or unless ecificall indicated on the Drawin s. Con I n m sp y g tea ed co cult eons concealed in all public areas induding exposed structure areas, with the exception of mechanical, service, storage, and other non-public areas. B. Route dl exposed conduit pardlel and perpendicular to walls. Conduit located above ceilings (accessible or inaccessible) may be routed point-to-point in the most efficient manner possible, subject to proper support and compliance with all applicable Codes and other requirements of the specifications. C. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point Do not cross conduits embedded slobs. Do not embed conduits in slabs on grade. Locate conduits a minimum of 2 inches below the bottom surface of the slab to avoid future damage from sawcutting of the floor slab. D. Install underground conduits at a burial depth in compliance with NFPA 70 requirements, local Code requirements, and utility company requirements. Install conduits at the ths indicated on the Drawin s where details indi t minim m cep g ca e u depths in excess of regulatory requirements. E. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. Group related conduits and support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. G. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. H. Cut conduit square and de -burr cut ends. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and fasten securely. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes In damp and wet locations, and to cast boxes. I. Install no more than equivatent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to moka,sharp changes in direction, as around beams. J. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, masonry walls and floors. Seal and fire stop conduit and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. Seal all penetrations through footings and floors water tight K. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control, and expansion joints. L Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. M. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. N. Ground and bond conduit as required by NFPA 70. END OF SECTION PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. Rated for weight of equipment supported and include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required for supporting luminaires and equipment. Use concrete type boxes for concrete ceiling applications. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum or cast feralloy with gasketed cover and threaded hubs. 2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction box; galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in locations indicated and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and In unfinished areas only. B. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. C. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas, secure to interior wall and partition studs and accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walla; provide minimum 6 inches and one stud separation. Provide minimum 24 inches and one stud separation in acoustic rated walls containing insulation and install without damaging wall insulation or reducing Its effectiveness. Use stamped at" bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs and adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. D. Locate flush mounting boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit comer only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented and install plumb and level. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. F. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires to be positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan and install outlet and junction boxes located in inaccessible areas no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. G. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. H. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. I. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. J. For large pull boxes, use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. K. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. END OF SECTION SECTION 26058,3 - IDENiIFlCA110N PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates: Provide engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background at each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure, communication cabinet, and control device station. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. B. Warning Labels: Provide all regulatory required and industry standard warning labels on all electrical equipment, induding high-voltage and arc flash hazard labeling. 2.02 WIRE MARKERS: Provide cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers at each conductor at ponelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and junction boxes for each load connection. Indicate branch circuit or feeder number indicated on Drawings and control wire number indicated on shop drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines and secure nameplates to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on paneiboards that are recessed in finished locations. END OF SECTION SECTION 260695 - FIRE STOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs which provide the scheduled or specified fire ratings when tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 and ASTM E 119. Listing in the current classification or certification books of UL or FM or current evaluation reports published by CABO. ICBO, or BOCA will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. B. The Contractor shall examine the Drawings for the architectural work to identify all fire rated, partitions, floors and assemblies and apply the appropriate fire stopping materlds and systems to maintain the fire rating of the partition, floor or assem I b enetroted based on the construction conditions d i cted 1.02 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturers recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent -cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FlRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. Use any system listed by UL or FM or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 or ASTM E 119 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Elostomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single or multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant; permanent durability and longevity. B. Foam Firestoppping: Single or multiple component foam compound; permanent durability and longevity. C. Fbered Compound Firestopping: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non -asbestos fibers; permanent durability and longevity. D. Fiber Packing Material: Mineral or ceramic fiber packing insulation; permanent durability and longevity. E. Firestop Devices: Mechanical device with incombustible or silicone elastomer filler and sheet stainless steel jacket, collar, and flanged stops; permanent durability and longevity, suitable for pedestrian traffic or vehicular traffic where necessary. F. Intumescent Putty. Compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain; permanent durability and longevity, minimum 1000 percent potential expansion. G. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows; permanent durability and longevity. H. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION: Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond. Instal backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.03 INSTALLATION: Install materials in manner described in fire test r ort and in ep accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely dosing openings. Do not cover installed firest in until Ins A 1 app g petted by uthority Having Juriad ctlon Install labeling required by Code. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials and protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION SECTION 260910 - TIMERS AND RELAYS PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAYS: Square D Class 8501, Type C, or equal, unless indicated otherwise. Provide with Form C contacts rated at 30 amperes union indicated otherwise. Coordinate coil voltage with the voltage of the control circuit. 2.02 CLOCK TIMERS: As specified on the Drawings. Provide with Form C contacts unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate input voltage with the voltage of the control circuit. 2.03 ENCLOSURES, Provide manufacturer's enclosure, Type 1 or 3R as applicable, unless indicated otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install Individual controls, relays and time -delay relays in enclosures adjacent to ponelboard serving controlled circuits and make electrical wiring interconnections as in i d toted. B. Provide all relays, contactors, interposing relays and controls as required to switch the loads in the manner indicated on the Drawings whether such independent components are specifically indicated or not. END OF SECTION SECTION 260919 - ENCLOSED CONTACTORS PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS: Square D Class 8903, Type L or Type S, or equal, unless Indicated otherwise. Provide with quantity of normally open and normally closed contacts as indicated or required. Coordinate contact rating to match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for continuous loads. Coordinate coil voltage with the voltage of the control circuit. Provide manufacturers enclosure, Type 1 or 3R as applicable, unless indicated otherwise. Where the number of contacts required exceeds the maximum capability of a single contactor, provide multiple contactors to achieve the required number of contacts and connect contactors in parallel with one another. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLA11ON A. Install enclosed contactore at 5 feet to top, adjacent to panelboard serving controlled circuits. Provide supports as required and provide engraved plastic nameplate indicating contactor number. END OF SECTION SECTION 262416 - PMELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: Square D Type NQ, or equal, for 240 volt doss and Square D type NF, or equal, for 480 volt doss. aluminum or copper bussing; ratings as indicated. Provide equipment ground bus in each panelboard and provide additional Insulated ground bus where the ponelboord serves isolated ground loads. B. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): As required for the available fault current but no less than 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt class panelboards and no less than 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt class panelboards. Where the available fault current is not indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor is responsible to determine the available fault current. C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, bolt -on type, with common trip handle for all poles; type SWD for lighting circuits; type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration equipment circuits; Class A ground -fault circuit interrupter circuit breakers where required. Do not use multi -pole circuit breakers that mount in a 1 -pole circuit breaker space (i.e. half-size circuit breakers). D. Enclosure: Type t or 3R as required; 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide unless indicated otherwise' su r fl m n dace o ush ou ted as indicated. E. Cabinet Front: Surface or flush type as indicated, fastened with conceded trim clamps, conceded hinged door with flush lock all keyed alike, metal directory frame, finished in manufacturers standard gray enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install ponelboords 6 feet to top of panelboard. Install panel e feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. I B. Provide filler plates for unused spaces In panelboarda. C. Provide typed circuit directory and engraved plastic nameplate panelboard. avi�e Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balange IQiwaYbrlcoa�' O ■ L=AWW m 800-581-0963 www.achrado l.com LAWREN GROUP - Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0816 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal: \\\\ OY $ ! j// fI .���() >: N'Cy�'4 �`• .-� 0 V 3F ' C'.�ii .,* 4�� C9 No PE .- ., 7 ` 'SUTE OF /�.� :�♦ P /e �� O ♦ �C t OR G ���///llltll��\\ 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: T N N N M Cd 70 .Lm _O LL 70 L_ 0 1>✓ !` ++ U 1` O Z � �(D O - W c O .� a) m W L 4- I c� _ U U m C W�--r M O O 1L IM � � N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Project Number, Sheet Number: 11256.C18 Drawn By: NLE Issue Date: September 20, 2011 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS D. Provide 5 empty 1 inch spare conduits out of each flush -mounted ponelboard to an accessible location above telling. Identify each as SPARE. E. All multi -wire branch circuits utilizing shared neutral conductors shall be located in adjacent pole spaces and provided with handle ties or other means of simultaneously disconnecting all ungrounded circuit conductors. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Measure steady state load currents at each ponelboard feeder, rearrange circuits in the panelboord to balance the phase loads to within 10 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION SEC110N 262717 - EQUIPMENT VAW PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cords and Caps: Use Type SO, multi -conductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations; suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. Match cord cap to receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. B. Other Materials: Provide disconnect switches, wiring devices, flexible conduit, wire and cable, and boxes and specified elsewhere. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturers instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. J. Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floors, and ceilings where applicable. END OF SECTION PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL SWITCHES: Commercial grade, side wired, AC only general -use snap switch; type as indicated on the Drawings; plastic body with plastic toggle handle, color as selected by Architect unless indicated otherwise. Provide separate pilot strop with green lens where plot light switches are indicated on the Drawings. Coordinate ratings to match branch circuit and load characteristics. 2.02 WALL DIMMERS B. Wall Dimmers: Semiconductor dimmer for lomps served; type as indicated on the Drawings; plastic body with plastic toggle handle and linear slide dimmer, color as selected by Architect unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate compatibility of dimmer with type of load served and provide power rating equal to or greater than the load but no less than 600 watts. 2.03 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. General: All sensors shall be selected to be suitable for the geometrical and environmental characteristics of the associated space and be suitable for the floor area to be covered. Provide multiple sensors when necessary to meet the required room coverage. All sensors shall be selected at the proper voltage and shall carry a current load rating greater than the controlled load. Sensors shall be appropriate for the load type switched. B. Wall Switch Mounted: Leviton ODS15-ID or equal, color as selected by the Architect unless indicated otherwise. Provide dual relay type, with dual manual override switches where necessary to control two lighting loads from a single sensor. C. Ceiling Mounted: Leviton OSC10-MOW or equal. Provide all power supplies required for a complete functional system. 2.04 RECEPTACLES: Commercial grade, side wired, NEMA 5-15R unless indicated otherwise or required by the load served, suitable for the environment in which it is installed, color as selected by the Architect unless indicated otherwise. Provide Class A GFCI receptacles where indicated or required by Code. Provide isolated ground receptacles with green triangle on face where denoted "IG" on the Drawings. 2.05 WALL PLATES: Provide nylon wall plates unless indicated otherwise; color as selected by Architect unless indicated otherwise. Use jumbo wall plates only for outlets installed in masonry walls. Any other use must be approved by the Architect. Use galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes located in unfinished area, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. Use ,gasketed, cast metal, hinged wall plates for all exterior locations and where denoted "WP on the Drawings. Provide weatherproof while -in -use covers for all receptacles installed in wet locations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height, wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates, branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices, and floor boxes are adjusted properly. 3.02 PREPARATION: Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface and clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install switches with OFF position down and receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. B. Install wiring devices in outlet boxes and connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Connect wiring devices by wrappingconductor around screw terminal. Install decorative plates on all outlet boxicluding blank outlets. C. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer where applicable. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated on drawings. All measurements are to the center of the box. B. Install wall switch, including wall dimmer switches and wall mounted occupancy sensor switches 48 inches above finished floor unless indicated otherwise. C. Install receptacles 18 inches above finished floor and countertop receptacles 6 inches above the counter backsplash unless indicated otherwise. D. Install telecommunications outlets including telephone, data, and television outlets 18 inches above finished floor unless indicated otherwise. E. Install telephone outlets for side -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches above finished floor and telephone outlets for forward - reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 inches above finished floor unless Indicated otherwise. F. Modify these elevations in masonry walls as required to locate the box at the joint in the masonry unit to avoid multiple or split -cut masonry units. Coordinate with the Architect on the exact location of boxes in masonry walls to minimize the required number of cuts. END OF SECTION SEC'110N 262813 - FUSES PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSES: Use Class L. dual element, time delay fuses for all circuits larger than 600 amperes. Use Class RK1, dual element, time delay fuses for all other circuits. Coordinate voltage rating of fuses with the voltage of the circuit protected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. END OF SECTION SECTION 262818 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSED SWITCHES: Square D Class 3130 or Class 3110, or equal, enclosed load interrupter knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch In ON position. Handle shall be lockable in OFF position. Provide NEMA Type 1 or 3R enclosure as applicable. Provide appropriate fuse clips for fusible switches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. B. Provide engraved plastic nameplates indicating equipment tag, NEMA fuse close, and fuse size installed. C. Mounting Height: 5 feet to operating handle. END OF SECTION SEC710N 265100 - INiERIOR 11.08 G PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify all ceiling systems for proper coordination of luminaire types and accessories prior to ordering luminaires, including any necessary plaster frames, T -bar supports, flanges or trim strips required for a complete, finished installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES: Provide luminaires as scheduled on the Drawings or equal. The luminaire catalog numbers listed on the Drawing indicate manufacturer, luminaire design, appearance, etc., desired. These luminaires shall be modified, if necessary, to comply with the specification. Luminaires specified will be the basis for comparison in the consideration of luminaires of other manufacturers. The sole and final judgment of substitutions lies with the Architect/Engineer. 2.02 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent Ballasts: Electronic, ANSI C82.1, high frequency, 10 percent maximum THD, instant start for T8 lamps and program start for T5 and compact fluorescent lamps, Class A sound rating, 0.88 or greater ballast factor, thermally protected, universal voltage. Provide low temperature ballasts, dimming ballasts, and other special features as specified or as required for the installation location indicated. Dimming ballasts shall be compatible with the specified wall dimmers or centralized dimming system control units. B. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: Electronic, 93 percent efficient, Class A sound rating, 0.92 ballast factor, thermally protected. C. Fluorescent Lamp Emergency Power Supply. Emergency battery power supply, sealed lead calcium type rated for 10 year life, suitable for installation in ballast compartment of fluorescent luminaire. Provide power supplies providing a minimum of 1,100 lumens output for T8 or T5 fluorescent lamps or a minimum of 950 lumens output for compact fluorescent lamps. Provide higher ratings when indicated on the Drawings. Include TEST switch and AC ON Indicator light, installed to be operable and visible from the outside of an assembled luminaire or behind the lens of fluorescent troffer luminaires. 2.03 LAMPS. As specified or required for each luminaire. Provide all fluorescent lamps from the some manufacturer to match color phosphors. Provide low mercury content type linear fluorescent lamps. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Although such work is not specifically Indicated, provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. Provide, complete in all respects, all luminaires shown on the Drawings, including ballasts, low voltage transformers, trim rings and extensions, plaster frames, stems, canopies, cords, pendant feeds, connectors, fittings, toggle bolts, restraints, etc., necessary to mount the luminaire in a proper and approved method. Coordinate the required accessories with the Architectural room finish schedule and details. B. Provide a disconnecting means that opens all supply conductors, including the neutral conductor of multiwire branch circuits, to ballasts that serve fluorescent luminaires that utilize double -ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that can be serviced in place. C. Provide fire -rated luminaire covers (tents) for luminaires installed in fire -rated ceiling assemblies. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. B. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing. C. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building fines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. D. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires in grid ceiling directly from building structure. E. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan and install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. F. Install dips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place. G. Install wall mounted luminaires and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. H. Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets using flexible conduit. I. Where luminaires are indicated for installation on low density ceiling material, mount on 1-1/2 inch ceiling spacers, unless UL approved for mounting directly to ceiling material. J. Coordinate mounting location, number of faces, and directional arrows of exit signs with the Drawings. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. K. Coordinate luminaire dimensions with the wall and/or ceiling thickness prior to ordering. L Bum -in fluorescent lamps controlled by dimmers for 100 hours minimum. END OF SECTION SECTION 271005 - CABLING RACEWAYS FOR VOICE, DATA, AND TELEVISION PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATHWAYS: As specified, provide pull cords in all conduit. Use PVC, Type EPC -40 conduit, galvanized rigid steel conduit, or intermediate metallic conduit QMC) with extended sweep bends for any service entrance conduits. 2.02 ENCLOSURES A. Backboards: Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 Inch thick; UL -labeled fire -retardant; size as indicated on Drawings. Do not paint over UL label. B. Outlet Boxes: Flush m me in walls 4 inches square b 2-1/8 inches de unless mounted Indicated otherwise. Use boxes 4 inches high by 2 inches p wide by 2-1/8 inches deep for wall mounted telephones. Provide cover plates finished to match electrical devices specified elsewhere. Label data jacks in accordance with TiA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers on the cover plate as to its function with a unique numerical identifier. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PATHWAY INSTALLATION A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least 18 inches below finish grade; encase in at least 3 inches thick concrete for at least 60 inches out from the building line. B. Provide a minimum clearance of 48 Inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment, and uninterruptible power systems, 12 inches from power conduits and cables and ponelboards, 5 Inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures, and 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes. C. Conduit: 1. Do not install more than two 90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run. 2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed. 3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except where specifically indicated to be exposed. a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and telecommunications rooms. Where exposed to view, install parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. b. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder, seal penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit. D. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with ANSI/J.-STD-607 and NFPA 70. END OF SECTION SEC71ON 2133100 - 171E DE'IEC710N AND ALARM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESIGN, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE A. Provide a fully engineered design of the fire detection and alarm system from a qualified fire detection and alarm system designer unless indicated otherwise. Any fire detection and alarm information indicated on the Drawings is strictly for the su ose of establishinga minimum criteria to aid the fire detection and alarm ystem designer in thdesign of the fully engineered fire detection and alarm drawings. Designer shall be NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician or registered fire protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control unit manufacturer, Contractor, or installer, with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Installer shall be an employee of a firm with minimum 5 years experience installing fire alarm systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business. Maintenance Contractor shall be some entity as installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Incorporate all new components into existing fire detection and alarm system. Provide all necessary control units, expansion cards, power supplies, etc. required to support the new components. New components that are to be connected to an existing fire detection and alarm system shall be of the same manufacturer as and fully compatible with the existing system. B. The Contractor may, at his option, choose to replace the existing system in lieu of integrating the new components into the existing system. However that replacement shall be at no additional expense to the Owner. C. Do not take existing portions of system out of service until new portions are fully operational, tested, and connected to existing system. D. Carefully coordinate all new signaling appliances with the existing signaling appliances. The tones of any new audible appliances shall match the tones of any existing audible appliances. 2.02 NEW FIRE ALARM SYSTEM: Addressable type. A. Where the word "should" is used in NFPA 72, consider that provision mandatory. B. Do not combine fire alarm system with other non -fire systems. C. Control Units: Notifier FireWarden 100-2(E), or equal, intelligent control unit capable of monitoring all required addressable initiation devices, operating all required notification appliances, and initiating all required auxiliary functions. Provide with digital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT) with two dedicated telephone lines that communicate to a UL -listed remote supervising station. Provide storage battery secondary power source, unless indicated otherwise, and battery charger capable of operating entire system for period of time specified by NEPA 72 and charging depleted batteries within 48 hours of power restoration. Use semi -flush enclosures in all areas except for unfinished areas. D. Trouble Sequence of Operation: System or circuit trouble places system in trouble mode, which causes visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at fire alarm control unit, trouble signal transmitted to remote station, manual acknowledge function at fire olarn control unit silences audible trouble alarm but visual alarm is displayed until Initiating failure or circuit trouble is cleared, and visual and audible trouble alarm indicated at remote annunciator panel if applicable. E Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of initiating device places circuit In alarm mode, which activates notification appliances, transmit coded signal to remote supervising station, transmit signal to building mechanical systems to initiate shutdown of fans and smoke damper operation as applicable, transmit signals to building elevator control panel to initiate elevator recall as applicable, and indicate location of alarm on fire alarm control unit and on remote annunciator panel if applicable F. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41 B3 combination waveform and NFPA 70, maximum let through voltage of 350 VAC line -to -neutral and 350 VAC line -to -fine. Do not use fuses. G. Connect control unit to a separate dedicated branch circuit with a separate, red, dedicated disconnect switch with lock -on accessory and label circuit as FIRE ALARM. 2.03 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS INTERFACES A. Supervision: Provide supervisory signals in accordance with NFPA 72 for fire suppression system control valves, flow switches, pressure switches, and corrosion monitoring probes where ever present, per NFPA 13, 13R and 72. B. Alarm: Provide alarm initiation in accordance with NFPA 72 for fire suppression system flow, kitchen hood fire suppression system activation including disconnection of fuel source from cooking equipment, and all other initiation devices present or required for a complete NFPA 72 compliant system. C. Trouble: Provide trouble signals in accordance with NFPA 72. 2.04 INITIATION DEVICES: Provide initiation devices made by the some manufacturer as the control unit. Provide flush mounted initiation devices where installed in finished areas. Surface mounted Initiation devices are acceptable for use in unfinished areas. A. Manual Stations: Semi -flush mounted, non -coded type, single action manual station with break -glass rod. Provide manufacturers standard back box. B. Calling or Wall Mounted Smoke Detector. NFPA 72, photoelectric type with visual indication of detector actuation, adjustable sensitivity, and plug-in base suitable for mounting on 4 inch outlet box. C. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector. NFPA 72, photoelectric type with auxiliary SPDT relay contact, key -operated NORMAL -RESET -TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, and visual indication of detector actuation. Include remote test/reset station for each duct mounted smoke detector, including audible and visible alarm indication and reset capability. D. Spot Heat Detector Combination rate -of -rise and fixed temperature, rated 135 degrees F and temperature rate of rise of 15 degrees F. 2.05 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES: Provide all notification appliances made by the some manufacturer. Provide flush mounted initiation devices where installed in finished areas. Surface mounted initiation devices are acceptable for use in unfinished areas. Provide visible notification devices in all public and common use areas. Notification appliances shall be white unless the Authority Having Jurisdiction requires red appliances. A. Visible Appliances: NFPA 72, strobe lamp and flasher with clear lens and red lettered FIRE" on lens or housing. B. Audible Appliances: NFPA 72, flush type fire alarm horn rated at 87 dB at 10 feet. Provide integral strobe lamp and flasher with dear lens and red lettered "FIRE" on lens or housing where combination appliances are indicated on the Drawings. C. Remote Annunciator. Where indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required, provide remote annunciator including audible and visual indication of fire alarm, and audible and visual indication of system trouble. Install in flush wall -mounted enclosure where indicated on the Drawings, subject to the approval of the local Fire Marshal. 2.06 WARE AND CABLE: Type FPL power -limited fire alarm cable or Type FPLP power -limited fire alarm plenum cable where permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All new fire alarm system wiring shall be new and shall be supervised for open circuits, short circuits, and grounded conditions. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but shall be not less than 16 AWG for signaling line circuits and 14 AWG for notification appliance circuits. 2.07 INSTRUCTION CHARTS: Printed instruction chart for operators showing steps to be taken when a signal is received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble). Provide stainless steel or aluminum frame with polycarbonate or glass cover. Coordinate mounting location with Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all components in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NEPA 70, and the Contract Documents. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas. Install all concealed, inaccessible wiring, Including wiring installed in walls, and all exposed wiring in conduit in accordance with NFPA 70. Conduits shall not enter the control unit or any other component provided except where entry is specified by the manufacturer. Where permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, wiring may be installed without conduit where accessible and not subject to damage. Plenum rated cable may be used only where concealed above accessible tie ceilings or accessible shafts. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation. D. Install instruction cards and labels. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identflcation used in operation and maintenance data. E. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Install control units with top at 72 inches above finished floor, manual stations with operating handle 4 feet above floor, and notification appliances with tops at 90 inches above finished floor or 6 inches below finished ceiling, whichever is lower, and automatic detectors per NFPA 72 requirements. G. Separate cables from any open conductors of Class 1 circuits and do not place in any conduit, junction box, or raceway containing Class 1 cables. H. Make connections to sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system control panels, duct smoke detectors, and corrosion monitoring systems as applicable. I. Connect duct smoke detectors to close dampers as indicated and shut down air moving fans on each unit rated equal to or greater than 2,000 cubic feet per minute or on units serving the some room or area where the total aggregate capacity of the units is equal to or greater than 2,000 cubic feet per minute, or as indicated on the Drawings. Interlock duct smoke detectors and relays for global shutdown of all air moving fans sharing a common return air plenum or serving a common room or area where the total circulation equals or exceeds 2,000 cubic feet per minute. J. Mount end -of -line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device In circuit. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Inspection and Testing: Notify Authority Having Jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities. Document each Inspection and test and correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with Contract Documents. B. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of Inspections and tests, operate system in normal mode for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions. Record all system operations and malfunctions. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction. At end of successful diagnostic period, fill out and submit NFPA 72 "Record of Completion" form. 3.03 PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION: Provide hands-on instruction for the Owner and Owner's personnel. Furnish the services of instructors and teaching aids and have copies of operation and maintenance data available during instruction. 3.04 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, copy of project record drawings, input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Repeat demonstration until successful. B. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieved until inspection and testing is successful, specified diognostic period without malfunction has been completed, all aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner, final acceptance of the fire alarm system has been given by Authority Having Jurisdiction, the occupancy permit has been granted, and the specified pro -closeout Instruction is complete. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Provide to Owner, a proposal as an alternate to the base bid for later acceptance, for a Maintenance Contract for two years, to include the work described below. Include the total cost of contract, proposal to be valid at least until 30 days after date of Substantial Completion. B. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by NFPA 72, including maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm system, and repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the control of the Maintenance Contractor, and record keeping required by NFPA 72 and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. C. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner. Provide on-site response within two hours of notification and include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to Owner. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly rate and definition of normal working hours In maintenance contract. D. Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance systematic examination adjustment, cleaning, Inspection, atesting, with a detailed schedule. E. Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed, and parts replaced. Submit duplicate of each log entry to Owners representative upon completion of site visit. END OF SEC71ON &J1rkXW1 agnim5e ■ Newlfbrlt ■ Orr■1■ ■ I= An" ■ 8005614M www. ichnadael�oom LAWREN GROUP - Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314231.5700 f 314231.0918 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seat:LA N3'9C�r�i r NoPE T ito, y 'SLATE OF ` �1 !!!i 1111 09%20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: T Cq M CZ 70 'i _O LL C/)o �--+ CZ Cn to C U) Cl) U cia (1)0) 3 (1) 0 Z� > 0 O - W o Ca CZ CL E U > (u 0 co v CZ M W � cL� CZ O O �M � U 2N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Project Number: Sheet Number: 11256.C18 Drawn By: NLE Issue Date: E6 September 20, 2011 NORTH PLUMM PLAN - WASM AND VENT SCALE 1/4' -1'—V I PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES I PLUMBING PLAN NOTES A. EXISTING CONDI TIONS ARE BASED ON "AS—BUIL T" DRAWINGS AND L IMI TED FIELD VERIFICA TION. CONTRACTC , SHALL ADJUST TO ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. B. 77-E CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN A COPY OF THE LANDLORD'S TENANT CRITERIA MANUAL. TENANT CRITERIA MANUAL REOUIREAENTS SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPL YING WI TH LANDLORD REOUIREA/ENTS AT NO EXTRA COST TO THE TENANT. C. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD VERIFICA TION OF ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING HIS BID. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSA TION WILL BE MADE FOR ANY EXTRAS DUE TO CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO VISIT THE , IOBSI TE AAVIOR PREDETERMINE ALL EXISTING CONDI TIONS BEFORE SUBMITTING HIS BID. ANY DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE IMAEDIA TEL Y REPORTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR RESOLUTION. D. ALL WORK SHALL BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE GOVERNMENT AND LOCAL CODES. E. SEE SKEET P3 FOR SANITARY RISER DIAGRAM. F. PROVIDE TEMPORARY COVERS, CAPS, OR PLUGS ON SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM TWOUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION. RAG WADS, DUCT TAPE OR OTHER MAKE SHIFT CAPS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. UPON COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION, COMPLETELY REMOVE ANY AND ALL OBSTRUCTIONS INSIDE THE ENTIRE DWV SYSTEM, NEW AND EXISTING LINES, BY SNAKING, RODING, OR JETTING THE SYSTEM IMMEDIA TEL Y PRIOR TO PROJECT TURNOVER TO THE OWNER. G. ALL BEL ON GRADE WASTE PIPING SHALL BE 2 " MINIMUM. H. INSTALL SANITARY PIPING 3" OR SMALLER AT A SLOPE OF 1/4 " PER FOOT AND SANITARY PIPING LARGER THAN 3 " AT A SLOPE OF 1/8" PER FOOT. I. PIPE SIZES INDICATED ON THE PLANS ARE MINIMUM. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PIPE SIZES EQUAL TO OR GREA TER THAN THE SPECIFIED SIZES. CONTRACTOR MAY INCREASE PIPE SIZES AS REQUIRED AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. 1. UP TO 4 " VENT THROUGH ROOF. INSTALL VENT THTOUGH ROOF A MINIMUM DISTANCE OF 15'-0" FROM ALL FRESH AIR INLETS AND BUILDING OPENINGS. 2. CONNECT THE NEW SANITARY SEWER TO THE EXISTING SANITARY SEWER OF EQUAL OR GREA TER SIZE. FIELD VERIFY THE EXACT L OCA TION, SIZE, AND INVERT ELEVA TION OF THE EXISTING SANT TARY SEWER PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. ADJUST THE NEW SANITARY SEWER AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR CONNECTION TO THE EXISTING SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM. MAINTAIN CODE MINIMUM PIPE SLOPES. LEGEND EX/S77NG NEW WORK ® NEW TO EXIS77NG CONNEC77ON khrki&el ■ NewYark ■ Omelw ■ L=AngW= ■ 800-5814M www.schnock4.com LAWREN GROUP - Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St, Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0810 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Sea(%%%%vtoy I i S/ N� N'4 i '�+ i C9 No PE0048442 r TATE OF �CORIDI 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Tttle: T' N M cz 116- 0 0 LL O er�etii Cz Clio CU) U) U CaCD — c 0 Cl) 0 z C/) >% a) o — W 0 CZ - oc °� (D -0 U U)> ._ W .�.—� � m 0 (DV Cz �m U cz o - W O oCY)1L <V Cfa 2LLo This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: PLUMBING PLAN WASTE AND VENT Project Number. Sheet Number: 11256.C18 Drawn By: LAM Issue Date: P 1 September 20, 2011 LAWREN - Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314231.5700 t 314.231.0916 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seel: L ( ROY SCyN���i ��O V�GENSF��'� 0 No PE0048442 "STATE OF JI AL 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 'rojeat Title: 1� N co Cz O L.L M is drawing and details on it are the sole property of the :hitect and may be used for this specific project only. hall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or rt, or for any other purpose or project without the tten consent of the architect. I. Description Date rile: 'LUMBING PLAN VAT E R t Number: Sheet Number. i6.C18 By: )ate: P2 !ember 20, 2011 L- 0 O Ucl) Acts IC Q� C/) U CCS '— c Z C/) > O I= CU W O c - 1 U m06 � 0 W'� W *.-m C_ > Q) V cz CL m W E C: a� 0 < 0M V -�e C O 2 N is drawing and details on it are the sole property of the :hitect and may be used for this specific project only. hall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or rt, or for any other purpose or project without the tten consent of the architect. I. Description Date rile: 'LUMBING PLAN VAT E R t Number: Sheet Number. i6.C18 By: )ate: P2 !ember 20, 2011 ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS MARK LOCATION KW GAL/HR ® 90 DEGREE RISE ELECTRICAL STORAGE CAP MANUFACTURER REMARKS VOLTS PHASE HWH-1 SHELF 3.0 13.7 208 1 20 GAL. A.O. SMITH MODEL: DEL -20 (1) 1. SET WATER HEATER STORAGE TEMPERATURE TO 1207. EXPANSION TANKS MARK LOCATION SERVICE MINIMUM HEAD (FT.) MOTOR DATA RPM TYPE MARK LOCATION SERVES ACCEPTANCE WORKING SIZE (APPROX) MANUFACTURER REMARKS DOM. HW 1.0 10.5 (GAL) PRESS (PSI) 1 60 2800 FET -11 HWH-1 DOM. HW 0.9 150 8"Ox12 1/2" AMTROL MODEL ST -5 (1) 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST PRE—CHARGE OF EXPANSION TANK TO EQUAL INCOMING WATER PRESSURE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. PUMPS MARK LOCATION SERVICE GPM HEAD (FT.) MOTOR DATA RPM TYPE MFR. REMARKS HP VOLTS PH CYC. P-1 HWH-1 DOM. HW 1.0 10.5 1/20 115 1 60 2800 INLINE B & G MODEL: NBF-12F/LW PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ALL WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RULES AND N. PROVIDE CLEANOUTS AT THE END OF EACH HORIZONTAL RUN, AND AT CONNECTIONS MANUFACTURER MARK THE BASE OF ALL VERTICAL WASTE AND DRAINPIPES. CLEANOUTS DESCRIPTION MODEL NUMBER HW CW TEMP V W WC -1 HANDICAPPED WATER CLOSET "CADET", 1.6 GAL/FLUSH PA, FLOOR MOUNTED, WATER SAVING TYPE, VITREOUS CHINA ELONGATED BOWL, -- 1/2" -- 2" 4" AMERICAN STANDARD / 2377.100 ----= BE ROUTED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE AND TIGHT TO THE UNDERSIDE OF PRESSURE -ASSISTED SIPHON JET FLUSHING ACTION, 16 ARRESTORS WADE "SKOKSTOP" MODEL NO. W-5 THROUGH W-100, SIZE THE STRUCTURAL STEEL. WATER CLOSET (FLUSH VALVE) AS INDICATED BY MANUFACTURER, WHERE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. D. EXPOSED PIPING IN FINISHED AREAS SHALL BE CHROME PLATED WITH VTR 1/2" HIGH BOWL, CLOSE COUPLED TANK, WATER SAVER CHROME—PLATED ESCUTCHEON AT PIPE ENTRY TO FINISHED AREA. URINAL SUPPLY TO EACH FIXTURE. E. SLEEVE OR CORE—DRILL FLOOR SLABS, WALLS, ETC. AS REQUIRED P. INSULATE ALL HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING BOTH VERTICALLY AND TRIM, FULLY -GLAZED TRAP -WAY, BOTTOM OUTLET, 31 FOR PIPING AND FIRE—STOP OPENING AROUND PIPE VERIFY LOCATION — wAGD — WASTE ANESTHESIA GAS DISPOSAL— BALL VALVE HORIZONTALLY, IN CEILING, BELOW ALL HANDICAPPED FIXTURES AND STORM DRAIN ABOVEGROUND OF STRUCTURAL BEAMS, JOISTS, ETC. BEFORE DRILLING. GLOBE VALVE CONCEALED IN WALLS COMPLETELY. PROVIDE 1" PREFORMED KS El 3/4" PROJECTION FROM WALL, 12" TO CENTERLINE OF - mss FIBERGLASS ASJ—VB, FLAME SPREAD 25, SMOKE DEVELOPED 50, ASTM F. ALL OPENINGS IN DRAINAGE AND/OR VENT SYSTEMS AS A RESULT OF C-547. SERVICE SINK INSTALLATION ROUGH IN SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH A TEST PLUG OUTLET FROM WALL, 2 BOLT CAPS, FLUSHES ON 1.6 PIPING ROUTED IN EXTERIOR WALLS SHALL BE ROUTED ON WINTER PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE <PRV) THAT IS SECURELY LOCKED IN PLACE UNTIL FINAL FINISHED ® CSS WARM SIDE OF BUILDING WALL INSULATION. —DW— CONNECTIONS ARE INSTALLED. —®— GALLONS. CS R. ACCESS PANELS SHALL BE PROVIDED WHERE CONCEALED CONTROL G. ALL PIPING SHALL BE CONCEALED IN WALLS AND BEHIND FIXED DEVICES, VALVES, ETC. ARE CONCEALED WITHIN WALLS. WHERE FURNISHINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. DRINKING FOUNTAIN ACCESS FOR ADJUSTMENT AND MAINTENANCE IS POSSIBLE THROUGH SUPPLY 3/8" CHROME PLATED BRASS TUBING w/ CHROME MIXING VALVE LAY—IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS, ACCESS PANELS ARE NOT REQUIRED. EWC PLATED ANGLE STOP w/ WHEEL HANDLE. S. TEST WATER SYSTEM UNDER 150 PSIG HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE, FOR HOT WATER CIRCULATING 180 ° TEMPERED WATER PATCHED TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AND SEALED WEATHER FIRE ALARM VALVE (SPRINKLER) FOUR (4) HOURS MINIMUM. WHEN TESTING INDICATES MATERIALS OR SH TIGHT. WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED BY CRAFTSMEN SKILLED IN THEIR WORKMANSHIP IS DEFICIENT, REPLACE OR REPAIR AS REQUIRED AND BATH TUB RESPECTIVE TRADES. SEAT HEAVY DUTY, ELONGATED BOWL, OPEN FRONT, LESS COVER, SELF-SUSTAINING CHECK HINGE STOPS SEAT 11" BEMIS / 1955SSC ALL PIPING SHALL BE RUN PARALLEL TO BUILDING LINES AND T. BEYOND VERTICAL —SM— SUPPORTED AND ANCHORED AS REQUIRED TO FACILITATE EXPANSION [K HB DRAWINGS. PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL AND CONTRACTION. ALL PIPING SHALL BE CONCEALED EXCEPT IN LAV -1 HANDICAPPED LAVATORY "COMRAD" 20"X18" WHITE VITREOUS CHINA, BACK OVERFLOW, FAUCET LEDGE SOAP DEPRESSION AND WALL 1/2" 1/2" -- 1 1/4" 1 1/4" AMERICAN STANDARD / 0124.024 ALL TEST, METERS, INSPECTIONS, HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT MANHOLE HANGER COLUMN NUMBER CONNECTION REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATING SYSTEM. VACUUM LINE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN FERROUS PIPING AND NONFERROUS PIPING, STREET WASHER PAINT PIPING ON A ROOF WITH TWO COATS OF RUST RESISTANT PLUMBING RISER NUMBER PROVIDE AN ISOLATING DIELECTRIC UNION. — PN— OUTDOOR PAINT. J. PROVIDE ALL FITTINGS, ACCESSORIES, OFFSETS, AND MATERIALS TRIM 4" CENTER SET WITH 4" WRIST BLADE HANDLES. CHICAGO FAUCET 802-317 SUPPLIES 3/8" CHROME PLATED ANGLED STOP WITH WHEEL SYSTEM SHALL BE FLUSHED AND PRESSURE TESTED. THE DOMESTIC INDICATED BY THE DESIGN AND THE EQUIPMENT INDICATED. -HS---- WATER SYSTEM SHALL BE PURIFIED. K. ALL DRAINAGE PIPING SHALL BE UNIFORMLY PITCHED, 1/4" PER V. DRAINAGE PIPING UNDERGROUND SHALL BE CAST IRON PIPE AND HANDLE, 3/8" CHROME PLATED FLEXIBLE BRASS RISER FOOT UNLESS OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY EXISTING CONDITIONS. ORD FITTINGS. L. PROVIDE A COMPLETE SYSTEM OF COPPER OR STEEL VENT RISERS W. DRAINAGE PIPING INSIDE THE BUILDING SHALL BE CAST IRON PIPE ODS ABOVE FLOOR. ALL VENTS SHALL BE CARRIED THROUGH THE ROOF AND FITTINGS. —�,+— WASTE GRID DRAIN, 4 1/2" OFFSET FOR WHEELCHAIR, 1 1/4" AMERICAN STANDARD / 7723.018 M. CONDENSATE AND INDIRECT DRAIN PIPING SHALL BE COPPER. TAILPIECE, 1 1/4" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED SYSTEM. C.I. JAST IRON — RUNNING TRAP I,E, ADJUSTABLE BRASS P -TRAP WITH CLEAN-OUT PLUG, 1 1/4" CHROME PLATED BRASS WASTE TO WALL, RUN PARALLEL AND AS TIGHT TO WALL AS POSSIBLE INSULATION ADA COMPLIANT, CHINA WHITE, ANTI-BACTERIA/FUNGAL, MOLDED VINYL, P -TRAP COVER, TWO ANGLE VALVE AND TRUEBRO / 103 E-2 SUPPLY COVERS, 5" OFFSET TAILPIECE WHEELCHAIR STRAINER COVER S-1 SINK "SIGNATURE" TOP MOUNT, SINGLE COMPARTMENT SINK. 1/2" 1/2" -- 1 1/2" 1 1/2' ELKAY / SLPF1515S2 #20 GUAGE STAILESS SEEL, SELF RIMMING. 15X15" W/ 8 1/4" BOWL DEPTH. HOME DEPOT SKU: 508842 TRIM DUAL 4" LEVER HANDLE SWING GOOSENECK FAUCET, AMERICAN STANDARD / 2475.500 DECK MOUNTED ESCUTCHEON, BRASS CONSTRUCTION, CHROME PLATED, GOOSENECK SWING SPOUT EQUIPPED HOME DEPOT SKU: 138235 WITH AERATOR, REQUIRES 2 FAUCET HO' -S 4" CENTERS. SUPPLIES 1/2" CHROME PLATED ANGLE STOPS WITH LOOSE KEY HANDLE, 1/2- CHROME PLATED FLEXIBLE BRASS RISER. WASTE STANDARD DUO STRAINER, FITS 3-1/2" OPENING (4-1/2- TOP DIAMETER), ONE PIECE STAINLESS CONICAL ELKAY / LK -35 STRAINER BASKET WITH NEOPRENE STOPPER, CHROME PLATED BRASS TAILPIECE, 1-1/2" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED ADJUSTABLE BRASS P -TRAP WITH CLEANOUT PLUG, 1-1/2" CHROME PLATED BRASS WASTE TO WALL. S-2 SINK "DAYTON ELITE" SINGLE COMPARTMENT SINK W/ FAUCET 1/2" 1/2" -- 1 1/2" 1 1/2" ELKAY / DSE125223 LEDGE. #20 GUAGE STAINLESS STEEL, SELF RIMMING. 25"X22" W/ 8" BOWL DEPTH, 3 FAUCET HOLES, 4" HOME DEPOT CATALOG # 100459918 CENTERS. TRIM DUAL LEVER HANDLE SWING GOOSENECK FAUCET, DECK MOUNTED ESCUTCHEON, BRASS CONSTRUCTION, CHROME AMERICAN STANDARD / 6424 PLATED, GOOSENECK SWING SPOUT EQUIPPED WITH AERATOR. SUPPLIES 1/2" CHROME PLATED ANGLE STOPS WITH LOOSE KEY HANDLE, 1/2- CHROME PLATED FLEXIBLE BRASS RISER. WASTE STANDARD DUO STRAINER, FITS 3-1/2" OPENING (4-1/2" TOP DIAMETER), ONE PIECE STAINLESS CONICAL ELKAY / LK -35 STRAINER BASKET WITH NEOPRENE STOPPER, CHROME PLATED BRASS TAILPIECE, 1-1/2" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED ADJUSTABLE BRASS P -TRAP WITH CLEANOUT PLUG, 1-1/2" CHROME PLATED BRASS WASTE TO WALL. EWC-1 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER SELF CONTAINED, ELECTRIC REFRIGERATED, BI -LEVEL, WALL MOUNTED WATER COOLER. STAINLESS STEEL -- 1/2" -- 1 1/2" 1 1/2" HALSEY TAYLOR / HAC8FSBL-Q CABINET W/SELF CLOSING LIGHT TOUCH PUSH BARS. ONE PIECE DUAL STREAM BUBBLER. SS -1 SERVICE SINK ATLANTA CULINARY EQUIPMENT. ONE COMPARTMENT, STAINLESS STEEL, FREE STANDING W/ LEGS AND BRASS 3/4" 3/4" -- 2" 2" ATLANTA CULINARY EQUIPMENT / SE18181M DRAIN MOP SINK. FAUCET "AMERILUS HERITAGE" WALL MOUNTED, 8" CENTERS 8" AMERICAN STANDARD / 7298.252 SPOUT, LEVER HANDLES, CHROME FINISH, PROVIDE WATER SUPPLIES AND STOPS, PROVIDE TAIL PIECE, P -TRAP AND WASTE ARM TO WALL. FD -1 FLOOR DRAIN COATED CAST IRON, TWO-PIECE BODY, DOUBLE DRAINAGE FLANGE, INVERTIBLE NON -PUNCTURING -- -- -- SEE PLANS SEE PLANS ZURN / Z415B FLASHING COLLAR, WEEPHOLES, BOTTOM OUTLET INSIDE CAULK CONNECTION, ADJUSTABLE ROUND SUPER-FLO STRAINER, FLASHING CLAMP WITH 24"X24" 4LB. LEAD FLASHING FOR FLOOR DRAINS INSTALLED ABOVE SLAB ON GRADE, 6" DIAMETER TYPE "B" POLISHED BRONZE TOP STRAINER. PROVIDE AND INSTALL A DEEP SEAL P -TRAP. WCO WALL CLEANOUT COATED CAST IRON CLEANOUT TEE, NO -HUB CONNECTION, BRONZE PLUG -- -- -- -- SEE PLANS ZURN / Z1446 COVER ROUND STAINLESS STEEL WALL ACCESS COVER WITH SCREW FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT "LEVEL-TROL" ADJUSTABLE FLOOR CLEANOUT, -- -- -- -- SEE ZURN / Z1400 -BP -VP DURA -COATED CAST IRON BODY WITH GAS AND PLANS WATERTIGHT ABS TAPERED THREAD PLUG, ROUND SCORIATED SECURED TOP ADJUSTABLE TO FINISHED FLOOR, BRONZE PLUG, VANDAL -PROOF SCREWS TP -1 TRAP PRIMER SANI-GUARD AUTOMATIC TRAP PRIMER. ALL BRONZE BODY W/ INTEGRAL VACUUM BREAKER, NON LIMING -- 1/2" -- -- -- ZURN / Z1022 INTERNAL OPERATING ASSEMBALLY W/ GASKETED BRONZE COVER. I\r \ \ Z,<-' 112" ,,../ // \ / S-1 N. \ WCO \ - WCO WC -1 IRS PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS 1.01 GENERAL: A. ALL WORK SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RULES AND N. PROVIDE CLEANOUTS AT THE END OF EACH HORIZONTAL RUN, AND AT REGULATIONS OF CITY, AND/OR STATE. THE BASE OF ALL VERTICAL WASTE AND DRAINPIPES. CLEANOUTS B. ALL AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION SHALL BE NOTIFIED AT SHALL BE OF THE SAME SIZE AS THE PIPES THEY SERVE. DESCRIPTION LEAST THREE WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. 0. HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING SHALL BE TYPE "L" COPPER PIPE C. ALL PIPING SHALL BE ROUTED IN THE SUSPENDED CEILING SPACE SANITARY DRAIN ABOVEGROUND ABOVE GRADE AND TYPE "K" COPPER PIPE BELOW GRADE, FITTINGS CLEAN OUT UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. ALL PIPING EXPOSED TO VIEW SHALL WC AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL AUTHORITIES. PROVIDE WATER HAMMER ----= BE ROUTED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE AND TIGHT TO THE UNDERSIDE OF GCOO ARRESTORS WADE "SKOKSTOP" MODEL NO. W-5 THROUGH W-100, SIZE THE STRUCTURAL STEEL. WATER CLOSET (FLUSH VALVE) AS INDICATED BY MANUFACTURER, WHERE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. D. EXPOSED PIPING IN FINISHED AREAS SHALL BE CHROME PLATED WITH VTR INSTALL STOP VALVE IN AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION IN EACH WATER CHROME—PLATED ESCUTCHEON AT PIPE ENTRY TO FINISHED AREA. URINAL SUPPLY TO EACH FIXTURE. E. SLEEVE OR CORE—DRILL FLOOR SLABS, WALLS, ETC. AS REQUIRED P. INSULATE ALL HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING BOTH VERTICALLY AND LAV FOR PIPING AND FIRE—STOP OPENING AROUND PIPE VERIFY LOCATION — wAGD — WASTE ANESTHESIA GAS DISPOSAL— BALL VALVE HORIZONTALLY, IN CEILING, BELOW ALL HANDICAPPED FIXTURES AND STORM DRAIN ABOVEGROUND OF STRUCTURAL BEAMS, JOISTS, ETC. BEFORE DRILLING. GLOBE VALVE CONCEALED IN WALLS COMPLETELY. PROVIDE 1" PREFORMED KS El KITCHEN SINK - mss FIBERGLASS ASJ—VB, FLAME SPREAD 25, SMOKE DEVELOPED 50, ASTM F. ALL OPENINGS IN DRAINAGE AND/OR VENT SYSTEMS AS A RESULT OF C-547. SERVICE SINK INSTALLATION ROUGH IN SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH A TEST PLUG Q. PIPING ROUTED IN EXTERIOR WALLS SHALL BE ROUTED ON WINTER PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE <PRV) THAT IS SECURELY LOCKED IN PLACE UNTIL FINAL FINISHED ® CSS WARM SIDE OF BUILDING WALL INSULATION. —DW— CONNECTIONS ARE INSTALLED. —®— PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CS R. ACCESS PANELS SHALL BE PROVIDED WHERE CONCEALED CONTROL G. ALL PIPING SHALL BE CONCEALED IN WALLS AND BEHIND FIXED DEVICES, VALVES, ETC. ARE CONCEALED WITHIN WALLS. WHERE FURNISHINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. DRINKING FOUNTAIN ACCESS FOR ADJUSTMENT AND MAINTENANCE IS POSSIBLE THROUGH H. WHEREVER FOUNDATION WALLS, OUTSIDE WALLS, ROOF, ETC. ARE MIXING VALVE LAY—IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS, ACCESS PANELS ARE NOT REQUIRED. EWC PENETRATED FOR INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS, THEY SHALL BE S. TEST WATER SYSTEM UNDER 150 PSIG HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE, FOR HOT WATER CIRCULATING 180 ° TEMPERED WATER PATCHED TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AND SEALED WEATHER FIRE ALARM VALVE (SPRINKLER) FOUR (4) HOURS MINIMUM. WHEN TESTING INDICATES MATERIALS OR SH TIGHT. WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED BY CRAFTSMEN SKILLED IN THEIR WORKMANSHIP IS DEFICIENT, REPLACE OR REPAIR AS REQUIRED AND BATH TUB RESPECTIVE TRADES. F REPEAT TEST UNTIL STANDARDS ARE ACHIEVED. I. ALL PIPING SHALL BE RUN PARALLEL TO BUILDING LINES AND T. PROVIDE A COMPLETE NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM AS NOTED ON THE —SM— SUPPORTED AND ANCHORED AS REQUIRED TO FACILITATE EXPANSION [K HB DRAWINGS. PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL AND CONTRACTION. ALL PIPING SHALL BE CONCEALED EXCEPT IN -4• SPRINKLER BRANCH HEADS H WH WALL HYDRANT AUTHORITIES. PROVIDE ALL UNIONS, SHUT—OFF VALVES, AND DIRT LINE UNFINISHED SPACES. INSTALL AS REQUIRED TO MEET ALL FIRE HYDRANT LEGS REQUIRED BY NFPA-54 AND GOVERNING LOCAL CODES. PROVIDE SPECIAL FIXTURE NUMBER CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS AND TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION OF COMPRESSED AIR LINE ALL TEST, METERS, INSPECTIONS, HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT MANHOLE OTHER WORK INCLUDING DUCTS AND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT. AT ALL COLUMN NUMBER CONNECTION REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATING SYSTEM. VACUUM LINE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN FERROUS PIPING AND NONFERROUS PIPING, STREET WASHER PAINT PIPING ON A ROOF WITH TWO COATS OF RUST RESISTANT PLUMBING RISER NUMBER PROVIDE AN ISOLATING DIELECTRIC UNION. — PN— OUTDOOR PAINT. J. PROVIDE ALL FITTINGS, ACCESSORIES, OFFSETS, AND MATERIALS U. THE DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM, DRAINAGE SYSTEMS, AND GAS PIPING -CS--- NECESSARY TO FACILITATE THE PLUMBING SYSTEM'S FUNCTIONING AS SYSTEM SHALL BE FLUSHED AND PRESSURE TESTED. THE DOMESTIC INDICATED BY THE DESIGN AND THE EQUIPMENT INDICATED. -HS---- WATER SYSTEM SHALL BE PURIFIED. K. ALL DRAINAGE PIPING SHALL BE UNIFORMLY PITCHED, 1/4" PER V. DRAINAGE PIPING UNDERGROUND SHALL BE CAST IRON PIPE AND -HS----- FOOT UNLESS OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY EXISTING CONDITIONS. ORD FITTINGS. L. PROVIDE A COMPLETE SYSTEM OF COPPER OR STEEL VENT RISERS W. DRAINAGE PIPING INSIDE THE BUILDING SHALL BE CAST IRON PIPE ODS ABOVE FLOOR. ALL VENTS SHALL BE CARRIED THROUGH THE ROOF AND FITTINGS. —�,+— WITH FLASHING. X. ALL FLOOR DRAINS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE SANITARY SEWER M. CONDENSATE AND INDIRECT DRAIN PIPING SHALL BE COPPER. -- SYSTEM. LEGEND EXIS77NG NEW WORK ® NEW TO EXIS77NG CONNECTION khrkow&el engh No ■ NewYark ■ Otntl■ ■ L=Ang" ■ 800-5814M wwwidmac adx= LAWREN GROUP - Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 P 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0616 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391.7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional sea```l- 1soy S'(!,`'NN��' ��0 4`G E s�.•. qC�/ zz 0I No P 2 ". i STATE OF / 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: T M Cz _0 LIL L O 4=J Cz W cn C /'�'� U CV 0 0 Z W 0 O - W 0 Cz oC U � E � Cn> ■ �� W L +—+ Rf m CC.) 0m H CCS cd W C �� O�LO 4< 0U 2N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS AND RISERS Project Number: Sheet Number: 11256.1318 Drawn By: LAM Issue Date: P3 September 20, 2011 �YMB=I—S� P L U M B I N G SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SANITARY DRAIN ABOVEGROUND --c-P —c-00 CLEAN OUT -TEW—C WC WATER CLOSET (TANK TYPE) ----= SANITARY DRAIN BELOWGROUND GCOO GRADE CLEAN OUT WATER CLOSET (FLUSH VALVE) - — — - VENT LINE N,I,T.C. NOT IN THIS CONTRACT — AW— ACID WASTE VTR VENT THROUGH ROOF UR URINAL -AV- — - ACID VENT VACUUM BREAKER LAV LAVATORY — wAGD — WASTE ANESTHESIA GAS DISPOSAL— BALL VALVE S— STORM DRAIN ABOVEGROUND GLOBE VALVE KS El KITCHEN SINK - mss STORM DRAIN BELOWGROUND --{�— CHECK VALVE ® SS SERVICE SINK -- DS— COLD WATER (CW) DISTILLED WATER J� �(Vt/�— PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE <PRV) ® CSS CLINIC SERVICE SINK —DW— DRINKING WATER —®— PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CS CLASSROOM SINK -Dw----- DRINKING WATER CIRCULATING --per— STOP AND WASTE VALVE ---- HOT WATER (HW) STOP AND WASTE VALVE (IN RISE) DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN ---- HOT WATER CIRCULATING (HWC)— MIXING VALVE EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER —1800 HOT WATER 180° GAS COCK -180 ° ---- 7 HOT WATER CIRCULATING 180 ° TEMPERED WATER FIRE ALARM VALVE (SPRINKLER) SH SHOWER HEAD BT BATH TUB —T----- TEMPERED WATER CIRCULATING —3— COLD WEATHER VALVE (SPRINKLER) F FIRE LINE --7;9— WATER MOTOR ALARM (SPRINKLER) —SM— SPRINKLER MAIN BRANCH [K HB HOSE BIBB FIRE HOSE CABINET -4• SPRINKLER BRANCH HEADS H WH WALL HYDRANT —G—GAS LINE V FH FIRE HYDRANT F-1 SPECIAL FIXTURE NUMBER A COMPRESSED AIR LINE O MH MANHOLE �-- COLUMN NUMBER VACUUM LINE SSW STREET WASHER o-- PLUMBING RISER NUMBER — Ox- OXYGEN LINE +-C* VALVE IN RISE — PN— PNEUMATIC TUBE EXPANSION JOINT -CS--- COLD SOFT WATER -HS---- HOT SOFT WATER ®D-1 DRAIN AND MARK -HS----- HOT SOFT WATER CIRCULATING ORD ROOF DRAIN —+�— UNION ODS DOWN SPOUT —�,+— STRAINER V.C.P. VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE -- AUTOMATIC BALANCING VALVE C.I. JAST IRON — RUNNING TRAP I,E, INVERT ELEVATION LEGEND EXIS77NG NEW WORK ® NEW TO EXIS77NG CONNECTION khrkow&el engh No ■ NewYark ■ Otntl■ ■ L=Ang" ■ 800-5814M wwwidmac adx= LAWREN GROUP - Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 P 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0616 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391.7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional sea```l- 1soy S'(!,`'NN��' ��0 4`G E s�.•. qC�/ zz 0I No P 2 ". i STATE OF / 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: T M Cz _0 LIL L O 4=J Cz W cn C /'�'� U CV 0 0 Z W 0 O - W 0 Cz oC U � E � Cn> ■ �� W L +—+ Rf m CC.) 0m H CCS cd W C �� O�LO 4< 0U 2N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS AND RISERS Project Number: Sheet Number: 11256.1318 Drawn By: LAM Issue Date: P3 September 20, 2011 VALVE SCHEDULE TYPE MANUFACTURER THREADED/FLANGED PIPING SOLDERED/BRAZED PIPING 2" AND SMALLER 2-1/2" AND LARGER 3" AND SMALLER BALL JENKINS 901A --- 902A MILWAUKEE BA100 --- BA150 STOCKHAM S-216—BR1—R—T --- S-216—BR1—R—S CHECK JENKINS 4092 624—C 4093 MILWAUKEE 509 F2974 1509 STOCKHAM B-319 G-931 B-309 AUTOMATIC BALANCING HAYS 43-45-2510-0.50—P/T N.A. N.A. NOTES: 1. VALVES MATERIAL (BODIES, DISC, GASKETS, LININGS, PACKINGS, ETC.) SHALL BE APPROVED FOR THE SERVICE IN WHICH THEY ARE INSTALLED. 2. VALVES SHALL BE LINE SIZE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. VALVES SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED. FLOW TO FIXTURE 12" MIN/MUM TO HORIZONTAL RUN /N PIPE — K—COPPER BELOW GRADE NO F1 TT7NCS OR SPLICES BELOW GRADE tt ,INSTALL PER PDI PDI STANDARDS AND SIZE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS SINGLE FIXTURE AUTOMA TIC TRAP PRIMER 1 /6" ci c1✓iAi c PDI SIZE PIPE SIZE FIXTURE UNIT LOAD A 1/211 1-11 B 3/4" 12-32 C 1" 33-60 D 1-1/4' 61-113 E 1-1/2" 114-154 F 2" 154-330 IF HORIZONTAL BRANCH IS LESS THAN 20' HOT OR COLD WATER SUPPLY IF HORIZONTAL BRANCH IS LESS THAN 20' LONG, PROVIDE ONE WHA A T END OF LINE IF BRANCH IS GREA TER THAN 20' LONG, PROVIDE ANOTHER WHA /N MIDDLE, EACH SIZED FOR HALF THE FIXTURE UNITS FIXTURE UNIT TABULATION FIXTURE COLD HOT VALVE WATER CLOSET 10 -- TANK WATER CLOSET 5 -- URINAL 5 -- LAVATORY/SINK 1.5 1.5 JANITOR'S SINK 3 3 SHOWER/BATHTUB 2 2 PC TO PROVIDE WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS BY SIOUX CHIEF, PRECISION PLUMBING PRODUCTS, WATTS OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT WITH PISTON AND 0—RING CONSTRUCTION, HAVING PDI #WH -201, ASSE #1010 AND ANSI #A112.26.1M CERTIFICATION. INSTALL IN HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL POSITION, BUT NEVER UPSIDE DOWN. INSTALL IN LINE WITH WATER FLOW DIRECTION IF POSSIBLE. SIZE THE UNITS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND/OR PER THE TABLES SHOWN ABOVE. WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS NOT TO SCALE SLOPE FLOOR \,//\,�/\ TRAP WA TER LEVEL TRAP PRIMER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE FLOOR DRAIN STEEL DECK - TOP BEAM C—CLAMP IF STEEL BAR JOIST ADJUSTABLE BAND HANGER FOR PIPING FOUR /NCH OR LESS DO NOT HANG PIPE LARGER THAN 3" FROM BOTTOM OF JOISTS. ALL— THREAD ROD. LENGTH AS REQUIRED FOR PIPE SLOPE PRO VIDE COPPER OR NON—METALLIC COA TING WHERE HANGERS CONTACT BARE COPPER PIPE CLEWS HANGER FOR PIPE 0 VER FOUR /NCH PROVIDE GALVANIZED STEEL SADDLE FOR ALL INSULATED PIPE LARGER THAN 3/4". VERIFY INSULATION THICKNESS WHEN SIZING HANGERS. PROVIDE UPPER ATTACHMENT AS REQUIRED FOR CASES NOT SHOWN HERE. DO NOT INSTALL HANGER INSIDE INSULATION OR OTHERWISE PENETRATE VAPOR BARRIER. DO NOT HANG ONE PIPE FROM ANOTHER EXCEPT IN CHASES. TRAPEZE HANGERS MAY BE USED FOR MULTIPLE PARALLEL PIPES. HANGER SPACING FOR PIPE SIZE: COPPER: 4"=12' 3"=11' 2-1/2"=10' 2"=9' 1-1/2"=8' 1-1/4"=7' 1"=6' 3/4"=6' 1/2"=5'. CAST IRON: 10' AND ONE NEAR ALL JOINTS. STEEL: 4"=14' 3"=12' 2-1/2"=11' 2"=10' 1-1/2"=9' 1-=7' 3/4"=6' 1/2-=5'. LOCATE HANGERS AS CLOSE AS - POSSIBLE TO TURNS AND TEES OF PIPE. PROVIDE SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL STRUTS BETWEEN JOISTS IF REQUIRED.LOCATE HANGERS TO TAKE LOAD OFF OF EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS. ANCHOR WATER PIPE AGAINST SWAYING DUE TO CHANGES IN WATER VELOCITY. PROVIDE SEISMIC BRACING IF/AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL AUTHORITIES. CHAINS OR PERFORATED STRAP IRON OR STEEL IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. REFER TO CODES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. PIPE INSULATION /HANGER DETAIL RECIRL COLD WA TER REC/RC NOT TO SCALE VS/ON TANK ORT STRAP TO BRACKET OR END FROM CEILING THREADED ROD. WA TER AND PRESS. F- VALVE WA TER HEA TER TO DRAIN WATER HEATER HOOK-UP_ NOT TO SCALE khrkxtel 8004581-0963 www.schnadalel = LAWREN - Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 1314,231.0816 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional Seal:vtoy �f,��►111l1t/�� �� W ..�,yN No P 004 2 ' STATE OF S�ONA1.��``� vi/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: AT 1A_ 1 N M Cz 70 .16- O LL CO o -F-+ a) CZ c �U) Cl) U Cz - C 0 0 Z W >1 Cl) O W c C Z Cz U u) > ■� m _ W }+ C � CDV �m vcz$cz W C cL3., LO Cz O O -�� 0 2N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Title: PLUMBING DETAILS Project Number. Sheet Number: 11256.C18 Drawn By: LAM Issue Date: P4 September 20, 2011 PART 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY A. Provide complete, approved sprinkler system as specified, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Sprinkler service connections to existing piping terminating above floor in sprinkler valve rooms with all required valves, devices, connections, etc. 2. Sprinkler valves, hangars, connections, test connections, drain connections, alarm check valves, flow switches, etc. 3. Complete interior sprinkler system of the wet type as indicated. 4. Include coverage for all canopies, awnings, vestibule overhangs, etc. as required by NFPA 13. 5. Identification, diagrams, and signs. 6. Cutting and patching. 7. All other requirements of a complete sprinkler installation. 8. Furnish all permits of a special nature required by local and state authority. 2. IN GENERAL A. The naming of manufacturers in the Specifications shall not be construed as eliminating the materials, products, or services of other manufacturers and suppliers having approved equivalent items. B. The substitutions of materials or products other than those named in the Specifications are subject to prior approval of the Engineer granted in writing. C. The Subcontractor shall furnish and install wet pipe automatic sprinkler systems of first quality in every and all respects, together with the necessary pipe, fittings, hangers and other apparatus as hereinafter enumerated and/or indicated. D. All sprinkler piping must be substantially supported from building structure and only approved type hangers shall be used. Sprinkler lines under ducts shall not be supported from ductwork or roof deck, but shall be supported from building structure with trapeze hangers where necessary. No fire sprinkler piping may be attached to Epic Deck or any metal roof decking. Suspend from structural steel only. E. Sprinkler equipment shall be completed and placed in service during non -attended hours in all areas. Every effort shall be made to provide sprinkler protection before combustible contents are moved into the building. Sprinkler Subcontractor shall plan his work with Owner's representative to determine which system will be required first. F. All work specified shall be done in a first class and workmanlike manner, complete in every respect and when completed shall conform to the present standards of the National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet #13 and to all requirements of the inspection agency of the owner's insurance company, to all local and state inspection agencies and to the requirements of the local utility. Pressure tests to be 200 psi or as required by inspection authorities, but not less than 200 psi. G. The Sprinkler Subcontractor .,all obtain the approval of local officials on system design and completed installation. 3. DEFINITIONS A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe size (NPS). B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA Standards 13, 14, and 24. C. Working Plans as used in this section means those documents (including drawings and calculations) prepared pursuant to the requirements contained in NFPA 13 for obtaining approval of the authority having jurisdiction. 4. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fire protection system is a "Wet -Pipe" system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system containing water and connected to a water supply so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers opened by fire. Wet standpipes are to be provided as required by local building codes. B. Fire protection system is a "Anti -freeze wet -pipe" system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system containing a glycol and water mix sufficient to protect piping from freezing and connected to a water supply so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers opened by fire. 5. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, pipe material, fire protection specialty, fire department connection and standpipe cabinet specified. B. Shop Drawings prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 identified as "Working Plans," including hydraulic calculations which have been approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 1. The Subcontractor shall before commencing installation of his work obtain all necessary insurance or inspection agency approvals and then send one sepia and one copy of approved drawings to the Architect for his review. 2. Shop drawings must be legible sepias of clear, sharp tracings, prepared at scale of 1/8" = 1'-0" and must show along with piping, sprinklers, ductwork, etc., construction and occupancy of each area, including ceiling and roof heights. 3. The sprinklers head layout in the shell shall be hydraulically designed. The gridded system shall be installed on an approximate 10' x 12', pattern, however calculations shall provide for two (2) heads per outlet. The shell area shall be designed for 130 S.F. maximum spacing of sprinkler heads. An odd dimension may be used to eliminate conflict with the ceiling grid. Tenant store drawings will be supplied as available for head location. The final head arrangement shall be shown before installation and incorporated in the as -built drawings. Main and branch piping to be kept as high as possible (just below roof joists) to allow higher tenant ceilings. In exposed ceiling areas, heads shall be symmetrically arranged with the light fixtures and room dimensions. Sprinkler head required in skylight areas shall be installed as concealed as possible, with exposeo piping routed on or behind structural members or skylight mullions. Piping will not be permitted to cross glazed areas of skylights or windows. 4. Calculations shall be based on NFPA requirements for mercantile occupancy. 5. Shop drawings shall be prepared using for reference all of the architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical drawings. 6. The placement of sprinklers and the routing of all exposed piping are subject to the review and approval of both the Engineer and the Architect for proper coordination and aesthetics. Pipe routing in exposed areas may require rerouting for architectural reasons, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Maintenance Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, fire department connection, hose and rack, and hose cabinet specified, for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 and Division -15 Section "Basic mechanical Requirements." D. Welders, quo I i f i cat i on certificates. E. Test Reports and Certificates including "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Above -ground Piping" and "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Underground Piping" as described in NFPA 13. 6. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontractor's Qualifications: Installation and alterations of fire protection piping, equipment, specialties, and accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer employed by the subcontractor. The term qualified means experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with all precautions required, and has complied with all the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Architect. Refer to Division -1 Section: "Definitions and Standards", for definitions for "Installers." B. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of AWS D10.9, Specifications for Qualifications ofWelding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR - 3." C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes: 1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. UL Compliance: Fire protectionsystem materials and components shall be Underwriter's Laboratories listed and labeled, and approved for the application anticipated. 3. Current Building Code and Uniform Fire Code as it applies to occupancy. 7. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule rough -in installations with installations of other building components as directed by the Construction Manager. 8. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, 3 valve wrenches for each type of sprinkler head installed. B. Sprinkler Heads and Cabinets: Furnish 12 extra sprinkler heads of each style included in the project. Furnish each style with its own sprinkler head cabinet and special wrenches as specified in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system products from one of the following: 1. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: a. Stockham b. Victoulic Company of America 2. Sprinkler Heads: a. Automatic Sprinkler Corp of America. b. ITT Grinnell C. Reliable Automatic sprinkler Co., Inc. d. Star Sprinkler Corp. e. Viking Corp. 2. PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Part 3 Article "PIPE APPLICATIONS" for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used. B. Steel Pipe (2 inches and smaller): ASTM A 120, Schedule 40, E.R.W., black steel pipe, plain ends. C. Steel Pipe (2-1/2 inches and larger): ASTM A53 or AB5, Schedule 10, E.R.W., black steel pipe, plain or roll grooved ends. D. The use of threaded "thinwaII" pipe will not be acceptable. E. The use of schedule 40 black steel pipe 2" and smaller with roll grooved connections on gridded systems is acceptable. 3. FITTINGS A. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI 81.20.1. B. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI 816.3, Class 300, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI 81.20.1. C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints. D. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable iron; or ASTM A53, Type F or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings. E. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: Consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure -responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll -grooved pipe and fittings. F. Cast -Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI 816.1, Class 125; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. 4. JOINING MATERIALS A. Welding Materials: Comply, with section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding material appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded. 1. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAgI (silver). 2. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 Tin -Antinomy. B. Gasket Materials: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled, and design temperatures and pressures. 5. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS A. Sprinkler Heads: Fusible link type or glass bulb type , and style as required by the application. Unless otherwise indicated, provide heads with nominal 1/2 inch discharge orifice, for "Ordinary" temperature range. B. Sprinkler Head Finishes: Provide heads with the following finishes: 1. Sprinklers for the proposed equipment shall be of the approved bronze and chrome upright and pendent; bronze and chrome flush and semi -recessed; and lead coated upright type, and shall be distributed throughout the building as required. 2. Sprinklers in suspended acoustical tile and gypsum drywall ceilings in service/exit corridors or office areas shall be approved semi -recessed pendent type, chrome plated with escutcheon of 1" maximum depth with supply piping concealed above ceiling. 3. Sprinklers within existing spaces with fire sprinkler coverage shall match existing sprinklers in color, K factor, temperature, and style. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. EXAMINATION A. Examine rough -in for sprinkler system piping and equipment to verify actual locations of piping and equipment prior to installation. B. Examine walls for suitable conditions where cabinets are to be installed. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. PIPE APPLICATIONS A. Use most economical combination of the following materials meeting all requirements. Alternate piping materials may be submitted for approval, subject to prior written approval by the Local Fire Marshall. 1. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller. 2. Install Schedule 10 steel pipe with roll -grooved ends and grooved mechanical couplings for 2 1/2 inch and larger. 3. PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. 1. The Subcontractor shall make no changes in installation from layout as shown on approved working drawings which may be requested by any Inspection Bureau or Insurance Association unless such change is specifically approved by the Engineer. Any changes made other than as above stated are at the Subcontractor's own expense and responsibility. B. Install sprinkler piping to provide for complete system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.. C. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions,in pipe sizes. D. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions, for rigid systems. Provide protection from damage where subject to earthquake in accordance with NFPA 13. F. Install pressure gage on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gage with a connection not less than 1/4 inch and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and where they will not be subject to freezing. 4. PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Welded Joints: AWS D10.9, Level AR -3. B. Threaded Joints: conform to ANSI 131.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows: 1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads. 4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used. C. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. D. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. 5. SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATIONS A. Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations. 6. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements. B. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems in accordance with NFPA 14 requirements. C. Replace piping system components, which do not pass the test procedures, specified, and retest repaired portion of the system. 7. FLUSHING CONNECTIONS A. Provide flushing connections in cross" mains as specified in NFPA 13, latest edition. 8. PIPING THROUGH WALLS AND FLOORS A. Sleeves shall be set in place for all pipes passing through floors and walls. B. In the event Sprinkler Subcontractor fails to set sleeves for passage of piping through floors and walls, he shall pay the Construction Manager to cut and install same. C. All hangers and hanger components shall be approved type. 9. FREIGHT & HAULING A. Deliver materials to job site and unload and stack in location designated by the owner's representative. 10. LEAK DAMAGE A. This Subcontract shall be responsible during the installation and testing periods of the sprinkler system for any damage to the work of others, to the building, its contents, etc., caused by leaks in any equipment, by unplugged or disconnected pipes, fittings, etc. or by overflow, and shall pay for necessary replacements or repair to work of others, building, store fixtures, or merchandise damaged by such leakage. 11. GUARANTEE A. At the completion of the work under this sprinkler contractor, this Subcontractor shall furnish, in writing, to the owner, a guarantee stating that all equipment, materials and work performed are in full accordance with the Plans and Specifications. B. This Subcontractor shall also furnish to the owner a written guarantee (in triplicate) that all equipment, materials and work performed under this contract, and any subsequent change orders thereto, are fully guaranteed for one year from date of final acceptance, and that any equipment, materials or workmanship which may prove defective within that time will be replaced at no cost to the owner. 12. MORE OR LESS SPRINKLERS A. The Sprinkler Subcontractor shall state price in the bid for more or less sprinklers than the total number of sprinkler heads as shown on the working drawings. This price shall include all necessary heads, piping, fittings, and labor per head and shall state price for installation of each type of sprinkler used job. 13. ACCEPTANCE A. Before offering system for acceptance, the Subcontractor shall furnish written proof that it is entirely satisfactory to the Inspection Agency, governmental bodies having jurisdiction and the local water utility. 14. CUTTING & PATCHING A. Chases, openings, recesses, etc. in new construction shall be provided where so indicated by the Subcontractors in construction at the locations involved. Subcontractors shall furnish information as to size, location, etc. and shall provide and set in place all boxes, sleeves, inserts, forms, etc. B. If he fails to provide the required data in time for openings to be left, or if he fails to set boxes, sleeves, inserts, forms, etc., Construction manager shall do required cutting. C. Openings shall be accurately located, neatly cut and no larger than necessary. D. The Subcontractor shall do rebuilding, patching, refinishing and painting required to restore construction to original condition before cutting, as approved by the Architect, using skilled craftsmen. 15. INSPECTOR'S TESTING A. Inspector's test connections, consisting of 1" piping, 1" Globe valve, and 1/2" special discharge nozzle, shall be provided and connected to the systems at required 'points. The subcontractor to consult with Construction Managers superintendent on the job to determine exact locations of Inspector's test connections and locations of discharge piping. Piping downstream of test valves shall be galvanized. 16. SUBSTITUTIONS A. If the Subcontractor makes any substitutions of equipment or materials from that specified he shall be responsible for any required changes in drawings and responsible for any changes and cost caused by changes to other contracts involved. END OF SECTION khrla&el u ghm , ■ Newyo* ■ om" ■ Las k*Wu ■ SOOZB14M www.scchnachdAwn LAWREN GROUP sm Austin Beijing Carolinas New York St. Louis Office: 319 North 4th Street Suite 1000 St. Louis, Missouri 63102 p 314.231.5700 f 314.231.0816 Project Team: General Contractor: To Be Selected MEP Engineer: Schnackel Engineers, Inc. 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 Phone: 402-391-7680 Fax: 402-391-7488 Contact: Jason Eickmeier Professional S�� Joy SL`y��,,� `��C�� V G E SF y% .� .. I } No P STATE OF lltll 09/20/11 CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION #28403 Project Title: r co cri 70 .O LL L O 4 �ca W Cn c Cl) 0(1) CZ W � 0 Z Cn ::�01 O - w c U c .E �> ■�Cf) W L +� m � � VCZ �m W C O . O i � U �N This drawing and details on it are the sole property of the architect and may be used for this specific project only. It shall not be loaned, copied or reproduced, in whole or part, or for any other purpose or project without the written consent of the architect. No. Description Date Sheet Tide: FIRE SPRINKLER SPECIFICATIONS Project Number: Sheet Number: 11256.C18 Drawn By: LAM Issue Date: P 5 September 20, 2011